JP6766855B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that displays a variable picture on the display screen. In this kind of gaming machine, for example, triggered by the prize to the working port provided in the game area, along with whether or not to generate a favorable grant corresponding state lottery is performed for the player such as a contact state, the picture The variable display is started. When the lottery is won, a specific pattern combination or the like is stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the grant-compatible state (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-074175

Here, in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the display mode of the pattern and the like.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suitably displaying a pattern.

The present invention
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
An acquisition information storage means that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers.
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the given information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of the special information is stored. Grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination for special information,
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the transition means for shifting the gaming state to the grant support state. ,
A pattern display means having a display unit and variably displaying a pattern on the display unit,
Based on the fact that the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means, the symbol display means starts variable display of the symbol, and the symbol display means so as to stop and display the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. Equipped with display control means for display control
The display control means has a stop display period setting means for setting a stop display period for performing the stop display.
The transition means is configured to shift the gaming state to the grant-corresponding state after the winning game times in which the determination result of the grant-determining means corresponds to the grant-corresponding result are executed.
As the grant-corresponding state, a plurality of grant-corresponding states having different degrees of advantage are provided.
As the stop display period, a plurality of stop display periods including a first stop display period and a second stop display period shorter than the first stop display period are provided.
When the type of the grant support state is a predetermined grant support state among the plurality of grant support states, the stop display period setting means of the winning game times, which is an opportunity to shift to the predetermined grant support state. A means for setting the stop display period to be the second stop display period, or making the stop display period more likely to be the second stop display period than the first stop display period .
In a situation where the stop display period of the winning game is the second stop display period, the stop result of the winning game is displayed as a stop corresponding to the second stop display period of the second stop display period. It is characterized in that it is provided with a means capable of being continuously displayed even after the end .

The pattern display can be preferably performed.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main structure of a pachinko machine in development. It is a perspective view which shows the main structure of a pachinko machine in development. (A) is a front view showing the configuration of a game board, and (b) is a schematic view showing the internal structure of the unit at the operating port. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning / failing lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by the MPU of the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows the information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game time control process. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a variation display time. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a fixed display time. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display control processing by MPU of the notification / effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start process for variation. (A) is a schematic view showing various display patterns, and (b) is a schematic view showing an outline of each variation display mode. It is a timing chart which shows the display mode in a high probability game state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for stage display. It is a timing chart which shows the display mode at the end of a high probability game state. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for hold notice in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a fixed display time. It is the schematic which shows the flow of the hold notice. It is the schematic which illustrated the hold notice in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the time determination table which is referred when the reach display does not occur. It is the schematic which shows the table for winning or failing lottery in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the table for the distribution lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the stop result setting process for the probability change jackpot result. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening command setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a fixed display time. It is a flowchart which shows the display mode setting process for opening / closing execution mode which is executed by MPU of a notification / effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the stage switching process which is executed by MPU of a notification / effect control device. It is the schematic which exemplifies the flow of the production when the 16R probability variation jackpot result B is obtained. It is the schematic which exemplifies the flow of the production when the 16R probability variation jackpot result A is obtained. It is the schematic which exemplifies the flow of the production in the case of the 2R jackpot result or the special loss result. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game when a 2R jackpot result or a special loss result is obtained. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the game when the 16R probability variation jackpot result A is obtained. It is a partially enlarged view which shows the game board in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 4 is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening opening and closing process executed by MPU of a main control device. It is the schematic which shows the transition of the operation target in the opening / closing execution mode. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a fixed display time setting table, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a flow of an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to each jackpot result. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game when a 2R jackpot result or a special loss result is obtained. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the fixed display time and the stop display time of a symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the fake effect by the movable effect device.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first form of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the game area is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. .. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting a plate-shaped frame material or the like on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. The outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration for the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided on the island equipment of the amusement park.

The game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation tip side when viewed from the front. It is supposed to be movable.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at the rotating tip portion thereof, and has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened. In addition, it has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 by using the unlocking key.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the game machine main body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. In the state where the game board 24 is attached to the resin base 21, the game area PE formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21. Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. 4A. FIG. 4A is a front view of the game board 24.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening has a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an operating port unit 33 having an upper operating port 33a and a lower operating port 33b, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a main display unit 43, and a display unit for accessories. 44 and the like are provided respectively.

When a ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, and the operating ports 33a and 33b, it is detected by a detection sensor arranged on the back side of the game board 24 and the like, and is determined based on the detection result. A number of prize balls are paid out.

In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and a game ball that does not enter various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area PE through the out port 37. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of game nails 38 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (roles) such as a windmill are arranged. ..

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through the predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening, but also the game area PE after passing through the opening. It also includes aspects that are not discharged from. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out port 37, the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device 32, the operating openings 33a, 33b or the through gate 35 is also referred to as winning. Express.

The upper actuating port 33a and the lower actuating port 33b are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and both are opened upward. Further, the actuating port unit 33 is provided with a pair of left and right movable pieces 34a and an electric accessory 34 having a drive unit for operating the movable pieces 34a.

The electric accessory 34 (specifically, the drive unit) is connected to the main control device described later, and is in an open state (support state or guide) that allows the ball to enter the lower operating port 33b based on the signal from the main control device. The state) and the closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) in which the ball cannot enter the lower operating port 33b are switched. It is sufficient that the electric accessory 34 can be switched between the first state and the second state in which winning is more likely to occur than the first state, and it is not always necessary to be able to switch between the open state and the closed state. ..

In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes having different support modes by the electric accessory 34 are set. Specifically, in the support mode, the frequency with which the electric accessory 34 is opened per unit time is compared in a situation where the game ball is continuously launched to the game area PE in the same manner. A low frequency support mode (or a low frequency guide state) and a high frequency support mode (or a high frequency guide state) are set so as to be relatively high and low.

In the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the operating port is higher than in the low frequency support mode. Then, when a prize is won in the operating port, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while suppressing the consumption (investment) of the ball.

Here, with reference to FIG. 4B, the operating port unit 33 provided with the operating ports 33a and 33b will be supplementarily described. FIG. 4B is a schematic view showing the internal structure of the operating port unit 33.

The operating port unit 33 is formed with a guide passage 33c that guides the game ball that has flowed into the upper operating port 33a to the recovery passage provided on the back side of the game board 24. The guide passage 33c branches into the first branch passage 33d and the second branch passage 33e at an intermediate position thereof.

At the branch position in the guide passage 33c, a distribution means 33g for alternately distributing the game ball that has reached the branch position to the first branch passage 33d and the second branch passage 33e is provided. The distribution means 33g can be switched between a first guide state for guiding the game ball that has reached the branch position to the first branch passage 33d and a second guide state for guiding the game ball to the second branch passage 33e. The sorting means 33g is configured to switch from one guiding state to the other guiding state based on guiding the game ball. Therefore, the game balls that have flowed into the upper operating port 33a are sequentially distributed to the first branch passage 33d / the second branch passage 33e.

The lower operating port 33b is connected to the second branch passage via the connecting passage 33f, and the game ball that has flowed into the lower operating port 33b directly flows into the second branch passage. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the upper operating port 33a flows into both branch passages, while the game ball that has flowed into the lower operating port 33b flows into only the second branch passage.

A detection sensor 211c for detecting a game ball is provided in the first branch passage 33d (hereinafter, also referred to as the first entry portion 33d), and in the second branch passage 33e (hereinafter, also referred to as the second entry portion 33e). A detection sensor 211d for detecting a game ball is arranged at a position downstream of the communication portion of the communication passage 33f. These detection sensors 211c and 211d are connected to the main control device, and the main control device enters the branch passages 33d and 33e based on the detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensors 211c and 211d, that is, the operation port 33a. , 33b is grasped whether or not there is a prize.

The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a leading to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening / closing door 32b for opening and closing the large winning opening 32a. The opening / closing door 32b is normally in a closed state in which it is not possible to win a game ball into the large winning opening 32a, and when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode (opening / closing execution state) is won in the internal lottery, the large winning opening It is possible to switch to an open state in which the winning of the game ball to 32a is allowed. Here, the open / close execution mode is a mode that shifts when a big hit is won. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined time (for example, 30 sec) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings is set as one round, and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) are set as the upper limit for variable winning. There is an embodiment in which the device 32 is repeatedly opened. It is sufficient that the variable winning device 32 can be switched between the first state and the second state in which winning is more likely to occur, and it is not always necessary to be able to switch between the open state and the closed state.

The main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are provided on the decorative member 39 arranged along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area PE. The decorative member 39 projects forward from the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 in order to make the game area PE visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and further, the window panel 62 The distance between them is narrower than one game ball. As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.

The main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 39. That is, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and the game ball can be seen in front of both the display units 43 and 44. It is suppressed from falling. In addition, on the upper surface of the decorative member 39, a part of the above-mentioned general winning openings 31 is installed in a state of being opened upward.

Although detailed description by illustration is omitted, the main display unit 43 has a segment display unit, and the segment display unit is provided with a result display unit for an operation port. The result display unit for the operation port has a display area for the first ball entry unit 33d and a display area for the second ball entry unit 33e in a one-to-one correspondence with the ball entry units 33d and 33e. In these display areas, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the operating ports 33a and 33b (specifically, the winning of the ball into the ball entry portions 33d and 33e) is clearly shown. In this case, in the same display area, the variable display (variable display) of the pattern is performed by sequentially turning on and off the lights in each display segment, triggered by the winning of the operating ports 33a and 33b, and the variable display is stopped. As a result, the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning prize will be specified. That is, the lottery result based on the entry into the first entry section 33d is clearly indicated in the display area for the first entry section, and the lottery result based on the entry into the second entry section 33e is the second entry. Specified in the display area for the part.

The accessory display unit 44 also has a segment display like the main display unit 43, and the segment display is provided with a accessory result display unit. The accessory result display unit is a display unit for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35. In this case, in the result display unit for the accessory, the variable display (or variable display or switching display) of the pattern is performed by sequentially turning on and off the lights in each display segment with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger. As a result of stopping the variable display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 is clearly indicated by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 35 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory result display unit and the variable display is displayed. After being stopped, it shifts to the electric service open state. In the electric service open state, the electric accessory 34 attached to the lower operating port 33b is in the open state in a predetermined mode.

The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 which has a display screen 41a and which displays (variably displays) the symbols on the display screen 41a. Further, in the variable display unit 36, a center frame 42 is arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 41 (specifically, the display screen 41a). The upper portion of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is suppressed from falling in front of the display screen 41a, and the drop of the game ball reduces the visibility of the display screen 41a (for example, the above-mentioned symbol or the image for holding described later). Is less likely to occur.

The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. On the symbol display device 41, for example, symbol rows are displayed side by side in the upper, middle, and lower directions, and these symbol rows are variably displayed so as to be scrolled in the left-right direction. In this case, the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is started based on the winning of the operating ports 33a and 33b. Then, for example, the symbol display device 41 presets the opening / closing execution mode for the game to shift to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 16 rounds in which the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened 16 times. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

At the lower part of the center frame 42, a holding lamp portion 47 corresponding to the accessory result display portion of the accessory display unit 44 is provided. The number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is held up to four times, and the number of times the game ball is held is displayed by lighting the hold lamp unit 47. It should be noted that the hold information corresponding to the through gate 35 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41.

An inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 are attached to the game board 24, and a guide rail is formed by the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52, and the game is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 53. The ball is guided to the upper part of the game area PE. As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launch mechanism 53 is attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21, and the game ball is launched by operating the launch handle 54 provided on the front door frame 14. The operation is performed.

The front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 has a window portion 61 that allows almost the entire area of the game area PE to be visually recognized from the front. It is formed (see FIG. 1 or 2). As shown in FIG. 1, the window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 described above is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the window panel 62 may be formed colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin.

Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window portion 61. An indicator lamp unit 63 is provided above the window unit 61 as a part of the various lamp units. Further, on both the left and right sides of the indicator lamp unit 63, speaker units 64 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided.

Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 bulging toward the front side are arranged vertically. The upper bulging portion 65 is provided with an upper plate 71 that is open upward, and the lower bulging portion 66 is provided with a lower plate 72 that is also opened upward. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 53 side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 72 has a function of storing the surplus game balls in the upper plate 71. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 of the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper plate 71 and the lower plate 72 through the passage forming unit 73 (see FIG. 2) provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14.

Further, in the area of the upper bulging portion 65 facing the front of the pachinko machine 10, an effect operating unit 75 (specifically, an operation button) manually operated by the player is provided. For example, by manually operating the effect operation unit 75 according to the suggestion displayed on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41, the effect content on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41 corresponds to the operation. It will be the production content of.

Next, the configuration on the back side of the game machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 81 and a notification / effect control device 82 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

The main control device 81 includes a main control board that controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board that monitors the power supply. The main control board and the power failure monitoring board are formed in a board box 83 made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is housed and constructed. The substrate box 83 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are inseparably connected by a box coupling portion 85 as a separation preventing means (or a coupling means), whereby the substrate box 83 is sealed. Since they are inseparably connected by the box coupling portions 85, the substrate box 83 needs to be destroyed or partially cut when the internal space of the substrate box 83 is opened. A plurality of box coupling portions 85 are provided on the long side portions of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used to perform the coupling treatment.

Any configuration can be applied to the box connecting portion 85 as long as the box base and the box cover cannot be opened, but by inserting a locking claw into the elongated hole constituting the box connecting portion 85, the box base and the box cover can be connected. It is designed so that it cannot be opened with the box cover. The joining process by the box joining portion 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the joining, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if the illegal opening is performed. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole among the plurality of box coupling portions 85. Then, when the board box 83 is opened when a defect occurs in the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box joint 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box joint 85 Cut the connecting part of the box and the connecting part with the box body. As a result, the box base of the board box 83 and the box cover are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the elongated hole of the other box coupling portion 85. If the history of the opening of the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 83 has been opened illegally by looking at the board box 83.

A plurality of coupling pieces 86 are provided on one short side portion of the substrate box 83 so as to project to the side thereof. These coupling pieces 86 have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main control device 81, and the coupling pieces 86 and the coupling pieces 87 form a substrate box 83 and a mounting base. The join process is performed between.

As a trace means for detecting unauthorized opening of the substrate box 83, a sealing sticker may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the sealing sticker is peeled off from the sticking portion, the adhesive layer of the sealing sticker remains on the substrate box 83 side, and a trace thereof remains. Further, the seal seal is provided with an IC tag that transmits a response wave including identification information to a ring wave of a predetermined frequency, and when the seal seal is removed, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the response is described above. It may be configured so that the transmission of waves is impossible.

The notification / effect control device 82 includes a notification / effect control board that controls voice and lamp display and control of the display control device (not shown) according to an instruction from the main control device 81. It is housed in a substrate box 84 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and a payout mechanism unit 92 and a control device collecting unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91. The back pack 91 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, the notification / effect control device 82, and the like from the rear. Have.

The payout mechanism unit 92 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover unit 94, and is a tank 95 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the amusement park are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 95. It is equipped with a payout device 96 for paying out balls. The game ball paid out from the payout device 96 is discharged to the upper plate 71 or the lower plate 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. Further, the payout mechanism unit 92 is equipped with a back pack board provided with a power switch for turning on and off the power supply while supplying, for example, an AC 24 volt main power supply.

Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal plate 99 on the rotation shaft side of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. The external output terminal plate 99 has an output terminal for outputting a signal when the tank 95 or the like runs out of game balls, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. Output terminal for signal output each time the player is rented, output terminal for signal output when the game machine main body 12 is opened, output terminal for signal output when the front door frame 14 is opened, state transition such as opening / closing execution mode An output terminal is provided for outputting a signal at the time (or during the transition to the state). Then, through these output terminals, a signal regarding the state of the frame side is output to the management control device on the game hall side. It should be noted that an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of game balls are rented is not required in a so-called cash machine.

The control device collective unit 93 includes a payout control device 97 and a power supply / emission control device 98. The payout control device 97 and the power supply / launch control device 98 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 97 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is housed in a board box. In this case, the same fraud suppression means as the board box 83 of the main control device 81 may be applied to the board box of the payout control device 97.

The power supply / launch control device 98 is configured by accommodating a power supply / launch control board in a board box, and the board generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by various control devices and the like, and is further produced by a player. The launch of the game ball is controlled according to the operation of the launch handle 54. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a storage and retention function for various data, and can maintain the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can return to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure. It has become like.

(Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 202 is mounted on the main control board 201 provided in the main control device 81. The MPU 202 is a ROM 203 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 202, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 203 is executed. It is an element having a built-in RAM 204, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. It should be noted that a configuration may be configured in which a part of the functions of the MPU 202, for example, the function of the ROM 203 and the function of the RAM 204 are provided as another element.

The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, various detection sensors 211a to 211e, etc. provided in the main control device 81 are connected to the input side of the MPU 202. In this case, the power supply / emission control device 98 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power failure monitoring board 205. Further, as a part of various detection sensors 211a to 211e, a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, operating ports 33a, 33b (specifically, the first entry section 33d and the second entry section 33e), a through gate 35, etc. The detection sensors provided in the various prize-winning ball-entry units (payout-compatible ball-entry units) are connected to each other, and each entry is made by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 based on the detection information (detection signal) from these detection sensors. The winning judgment (ball winning judgment) for the ball part is performed. Further, in the MPU 202, the jackpot generation lottery is executed based on the winning of the operating ports 33a and 33b, and the support generation lottery is executed based on the winning of the through gate 35.

A power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, and a notification / effect control device 82 are connected to the output side of the MPU 202. The payout control device 97 outputs a prize ball command based on, for example, a prize-winning determination result to the prize-winning ball-winning portions such as the above-mentioned operating ports 33a and 33b. In this case, the command information storage area 224 of the ROM 203 is referred to when the prize ball command is output. Then, when the winning to the general winning opening 31 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when the winning to the variable winning device 32 is specified, 15 game balls are output. The prize ball command corresponding to the payout is output, and when the winning to the first ball entry section 33d is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output to the second entry section 33e. When the prize is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is output.

Various commands such as a change command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, an ending command, a hold command, and a shift command are output from the main control device 81 to the notification / effect control device 82. In this case, the command information storage area 224 of the ROM 203 is referred to when outputting these various commands. Details of these various commands will be described later. It should be noted that each of the above commands is configured as information on a predetermined number of bytes, and includes various information as information on the predetermined number of bytes.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 202, a variable winning drive unit 32c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 32b of the variable winning device 32, an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the movable piece 34a of the electric accessory 34, and a main display unit. 43 is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 201, and the MPU 202 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

That is, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 32c is executed in the MPU 202 so that the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the support lottery for the electric accessory 34 is won, the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b is executed in the MPU 202 so that the electric accessory 34 is opened and closed. In addition, the display control of the main display unit 43 is executed by the MPU 202.

Further, an external output terminal board 99 is connected to the output side of the MPU 202, and through this external output terminal board 99, the management control device (hall computer HC) on the game hall side is informed of the entry into various ball entry sections. Information about lottery results such as jackpots and jackpots is output. This makes it possible for the hall computer HC to grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10 and the like.

The power failure monitoring board 205 relays the main control board 201 and the power supply / launch control device 98, and the power failure monitoring board 205 has a DC stable 24 volt voltage which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / launch control device 98. The function to monitor is given. The payout control device 97 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

The power supply / launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a playground or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 201, the payout control device 97, and the like is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do. Further, the power supply / launch control device 98 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 53, and the game ball launch mechanism 53 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied.

The notification / effect control device 82 has a hold lamp unit 47 provided in the variable display unit 36, a display lamp unit 63 provided in the front door frame 14, and a speaker unit 64 based on various commands input from the main control device 81. Etc. are driven and controlled, and the display control device 212 is controlled.

The display control device 212 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command input from the notification / effect control device 82. In this case, in the notification / effect control device 82, based on various commands input from the main control device 81, the variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 (for example, the presence / absence of reach occurrence and the content of the reach effect), the symbol The outline of the stop display mode (the type of combination of symbols that are finally stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display) and the final display mode by the combination of the stop-displayed symbols are specified.

Here, the configuration related to the variable display of the symbol of each game and the content of the variable display will be described. In the following description, FIGS. 6 and 7 will be referred to as appropriate. 6 and 7 are schematic views for explaining the display contents on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41.

The display control device 212 is provided with a character ROM. In the character ROM, data of nine types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" (see FIGS. 6 (a) to 6 (i)) and data of sub-symbols without numbers are attached. (See FIG. 6 (j)) is stored in advance.

As shown in FIG. 7A, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Then, on the display screen 41a, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left) with periodicity.

In the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7B, on the display screen 41a, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be done. Further, on the display screen 41a, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols with the same number) is formed on one of the effective lines. When the variable display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed in this state, a movie for big hit (for example, an opening movie) is displayed as a big hit result.

In view of the fact that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the lower symbol row Z3 is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). (2 pattern rows), the middle symbol row Z2 can be referred to as a third symbol row (or a third symbol row).

Of the above main symbols, the main symbols with odd numbers (1,3,5,7,9) correspond to "specific symbols", and the first type jackpot result (16R compatible jackpot result) occurs. For example, a combination of the same specific symbols is stopped and displayed in. In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when the second type jackpot result (4R corresponding jackpot result) occurs, for example, they are the same. The combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed.

The mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be set to be arranged side by side, and the direction of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol row may be set to the vertical direction.

On the display screen 41a, a hold display area NE is set in a portion below the variable display area ME having the variable display area of the upper symbol row, the variable display area of the middle symbol, and the variable display area of the lower symbol. ing. In the hold display area NE, the same number of unit hold display areas Da1 to Da8 as the maximum number of holds when the game ball wins the operating ports 33a and 33b (when the ball enters the ball entry portions 33d and 33e) A hold number display area Da is provided so as to be arranged in the left-right direction.

Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls when the game ball enters the first entry section 33d is 4, and the maximum number of reserved balls when the game ball enters the second entry section 33e is 4. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a total of eight hold information is stored in the order of winning the first ball entry unit 33d and the second ball entry unit 33e. Corresponding to this, the hold number display area Da includes the first unit hold display area Da1, the second unit hold display area Da2, the third unit hold display area Da3, the fourth unit hold display area Da4, and the fifth unit hold display. Area Da5, 6th unit hold display area Da6, 7th unit hold display area Da7, and 8th unit hold display area Da8 are set.

For example, when the number of holdings (total number of holdings) when the game ball wins the operating ports 33a and 33b is 1, the predetermined holding display image MP is displayed only in the first unit holding display area Da1. , When the number of holdings is 4 when the game ball wins the operating ports 33a and 33b, the predetermined holding display image MP is displayed in the 1st unit holding display area Da1 to the 4th unit holding display area Da4. It is configured to be. Note that FIG. 6B illustrates a case where the number of reserved items is three.

In addition, the hold display area NE is arranged side by side with the hold number display area Da (specifically, the first unit hold display area Da1), and the hold display image corresponding to the game times to be executed (executed) is displayed. An execution target display area Db on which the MP is displayed is provided.

When the game round is completed and the game is moved to the next game round, the hold display image MP displayed in the hold number display area Da (first unit hold display area Da1) moves to the execution target display area Db. The hold display image MP displayed in the hold number display area Da is shifted to the lower side.

(About various counters)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

The MPU 202 uses various counter information during the game to perform a jackpot generation lottery, a display setting of the main display unit 43, an outline setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, a display setting of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 8, when determining the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for generating jackpots and the jackpot type such as the first-class jackpot result and the second-class jackpot result. The jackpot type counter C2 to be used, the reach random number counter C3 used for the reach lottery when the symbol display device 41 deviates and fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the main display unit. The result display unit for the operation port of 43 and the fluctuation type counter CS for determining the fluctuation display time in the symbol display device 41 are used. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 34 of the lower operating port 33b is set to the electric service open state is used.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 204. In the lottery counter buffer 231, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is used to win prizes in the operating ports 33a and 33b (specifically, the first ball entry unit 33d or the second ball entry unit). When a ball enters the 33e) occurs, it is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 as the acquisition information storage means.

The holding ball storage area 232 includes a holding area RE for an operation port and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first area Ra1, a second area Ra2, a third area Ra3, a fourth area Ra4, a fifth area Ra5, a sixth area Ra6, a seventh area Ra7, and an eighth area Ra8, and operates. The jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 according to the winning history of the mouths 33a and 33b (specifically, the history of winning the first ball 33d and the second ball 33e). Each numerical information of the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as hold information in any of the areas Ra1 to Ra8. The reserved information corresponds to special information.

In the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8, when the operating ports 33a and 33b are awarded (specifically, the first ball entry 33d and the second ball entry 33e are entered) a plurality of times in succession. In addition, each numerical information is time-series in the order of 1st area Ra1 → 2nd area Ra2 → 3rd area Ra3 → 4th area Ra4 → 5th area Ra5 → 6th area Ra6 → 7th area Ra7 → 8th area Ra8. It will be stored in. By providing the eight areas Ra1 to Ra8 in this way, the entry history of the game ball into the first entry section 33d and the second entry section 33e is four, that is, to the operating ports 33a and 33b, respectively. Up to a total of 8 winning histories are stored on hold. Further, the reserved ball storage area 232 is provided with a total reserved number storage area, and the total reserved number storage area is acquired and acquired based on the entry into the first entry section 33d or the second entry section 33e. Information for specifying the number of stored pending information is stored.

For example, if only one of the first ball entry section 33d and the second ball entry section 33e is hit, and the number is 4 or more, the maximum number of stored balls related to winning the operating ports 33a and 33b. Is limited to four, but as long as the game balls alternately enter the first entry section 33d and the second entry section 33e by the distribution means 33g described above, the operating ports 33a and 33b are won. The maximum number of stored items related to the above will be increased to eight. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the number of stored information from reaching a plateau at four even in a situation where it is difficult for the lower operating port 33b to win a prize. ..

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area Ra1 of the hold area RE when starting the variable display of the main display unit 43, and is an execution area at the start of one game. Based on various numerical information stored in the AE, a hit / fail judgment or the like is performed.

More specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 299, reach the maximum value (that is, 299), and then return to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 299). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when a game ball wins a prize in the operating ports 33a and 33b, the timing at which the game ball flowing into the ball entry portions 33d and 33e is detected by the detection sensors 211c and 211d. Is stored in the hold ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a hit / miss table (win / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area 221 as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the pass / fail table will be described.

In the pass / fail table, the address information consisting of binary information and the jackpot numerical information also consisting of binary information are set in a one-to-one correspondence. Specifically, 10 types of address information expressed in decimal numbers from "1" to "10" are set, and jackpot numerical information is expressed in decimal numbers as "7", "36", "67". , "100", "131", "164", "195", "223", "241", "272" are set, and these address information and jackpot numerical information are one-to-one. It is associated. The numerical value of each jackpot numerical information is included in "0" to "299", which is a numerical range of random number information that can be updated by the jackpot random number counter C1.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning / losing lottery means. The number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the low probability mode is different from the number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the high probability mode, and the former is smaller than the latter. Specifically, in the low probability mode, only the jackpot numerical information whose address information is "1" is referred to in the winning / failing lottery, and in the high probability mode, the jackpot numerical information corresponding to all the address information is referred to in the winning / losing lottery. Seen. That is, in the low-probability mode, there is one numerical information that is a big hit, and in the high-probability mode, there are ten more than in the low-probability mode. As a result, the probability of winning a big hit in the low probability mode is 1/300, whereas the probability of winning a big hit in the high probability mode is 1/30, and the high probability mode is a big hit than the low probability mode. The probability of winning is high. If the winning probability of the high probability mode is higher than that of the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value (that is, 29), and then return to 0. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when a game ball wins a prize in the operating ports 33a and 33b, more specifically, the timing at which the game ball flowing into the ball entry portions 33d and 33e is detected by the detection sensors 211c and 211d. Is stored in the hold ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203. Then, as the distribution destination, a first-class jackpot result (15R-compatible special game result) and a second-class jackpot result (4R-compatible special game result) are set.

If the first-class jackpot result and the second-class jackpot result are won, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode shifts. This is a jackpot result in which the high-frequency support mode is set until the number of games is the end reference number (specifically, 100 times). After the end reference number of times (specified number of times) has elapsed, the state shifts to the normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. In the following description, the gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode is referred to as a high probability gaming state.

The variable winning device 32 is opened 16 times when the result of the first-class big hit is obtained, and the variable winning device 32 is opened four times when the result of the second-class big hit is obtained. That is, the type 1 jackpot result is set so that the number of game balls that can be acquired in the open / close execution mode is larger than that of the type 2 jackpot result, and the degree of advantage is set differently.

In the distribution table corresponding to the first ball entry unit 33d, "0 to 9" corresponds to the first type jackpot result, "10 to 29" corresponds to the second type jackpot result, and the second In the distribution table corresponding to the ball entry unit 33e, "0 to 19" corresponds to the type 1 jackpot result, and "20 to 29" corresponds to the type 2 jackpot result. As a result, the difference is provided so that the distribution based on the entry into the second entry section 33e is more advantageous to the player than the distribution based on the entry into the first entry section 33d.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and when a game ball wins a prize in the operating ports 33a and 33b, more specifically, the timing at which the game ball flowing into the ball entry portions 33d and 33e is detected by the detection sensors 211c and 211d. Is stored in the hold ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204. Then, it is decided whether or not to generate the reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203. However, in the game round that shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 202 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state, but may be set individually according to the game state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display may be set to be larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

Here, the reach display (reach state) is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture), and the game result is a game result corresponding to the open / close execution mode. In the game machine in which the stop display result after the variation display is the special display result in the game times, the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variation display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 41 is started. In the previous stage, it refers to a display state for making the player think that the special display result is likely to be a variable display state.

In other words, by stopping and displaying some of the symbol strings among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41, a combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is established. It is a display state in which a combination of possible reach symbols is displayed, and in that state, the symbols are variablely displayed in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a pre-stage for ending the variable display of the symbol, a combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is established on the preset effective line in the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of possible reach symbols, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence.

With reference to FIG. 7, a display mode in the case of the above reach display will be illustrated. In the case of reach display, the fluctuation display of the symbol is first terminated (stopped display) in the upper symbol row Z1, and then the fluctuation display of the symbol is terminated (stopped display) in the lower symbol row Z3. In the state, the reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the same numbers on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. Then, in the situation where the reach line is formed, the reach display is obtained by performing the variable display of the symbols in the symbol row Z2 in the middle row. Then, when the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the symbol row Z2 in the middle row is displayed. The variable display of the symbol in is finished.

Further, in the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to reach the reach. Includes those that perform an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen after reducing or hiding the combination of reach symbols. Further, when the reach display is performed or whether or not to perform the precursor display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character before the reach display is performed, the reach random number counter C3 or other counters are used to determine. It may be.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 202 to determine the variation display time on the main display unit 43 and the variation display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, when the symbol display device 41 determines the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation of the symbol, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired.

When determining the fluctuation display time in the symbol display device 41 or the main display unit 43 (specifically, the result display unit for the operating port), the buffer value of the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS, and the display time table storage area of ROM 203. 223 is referenced. Further, in the MPU 202, the stop result in the result display unit for the operation port is determined by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. The stop result determination table stored in the ROM 203 is used.

The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 249, reach the maximum value (that is, 249), and then return to 0. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric service holding area 233 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34 to the open state according to the value of the stored electric accessory opening counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 199, the electric accessory 34 is controlled to the open state, and if C4 = 200 to 249, the electric accessory 34 is not controlled to the open state.

(About various processes executed by the main controller 81)
Next, the timer interrupt process and the normal process executed in advancing the game in each game time by the MPU 202 in the main control device 81 will be described. In the MPU 202, in addition to the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing, the main processing activated when the power is turned on and the NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) are executed. , The description of these various processes will be omitted.

(Timer interrupt processing)
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is periodically activated by the MPU 202 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various winning detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various winning detection sensors connected to the main control device 81 is read, the state of the winning detection sensor is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

After that, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

In the following step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

In the following step S104, a winning process for thru accompanying the winning of the thru gate 35 is executed. In the through winning process, it is determined whether or not the through gate winning detection flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204, and if the flag is stored, it is stored in the electric service holding area. The value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric service holding area on condition that the number of stored accessory holdings is less than 4. Further, the notification / effect control device 82 is subjected to a process for lighting the hold lamp unit 47 of the variable display unit 36 corresponding to the number of hold storages. Then, when the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage areas 235, the winning detection flag for the through gate is deleted and the winning process for the through gate is completed.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105, and in the step S105, the winning process for the operating port accompanying the winning of the operating ports 33a and 33b is executed, and the timer interrupt process ends. To do.

<Prize processing for operating port>
Here, the winning process for the operating port will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 10 and 11.

In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (winned) the first entry unit 33d. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the first ball entry unit 33d, the process proceeds to step S202, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out three game balls is set.

In the following step S203, an external signal setting process is performed so as to output a signal indicating that the game ball has entered the first ball entry unit 33d to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC grasps that the ball has entered the first ball entry unit 33d. After that, in step S204, information acquisition processing for storing each value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 is performed, and the main winning process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the first ball entry portion 33d, the process proceeds to step S205. In step S205, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (winned) the second entry portion 33e. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second entry unit 33e, the process proceeds to step S205, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out four game balls is set. The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S205 is transmitted to the payout control device 97 in the external output process S401 of the normal process described later.

In the following step S207, an external signal setting process is performed so as to output a signal indicating that the game ball has entered the second ball entry unit 33e to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC grasps that the ball has entered the second ball entry unit 33e. After that, the information acquisition process is performed in step S204, and the main winning process is completed.

If a negative determination is made in both the processes of steps S201 and S205, that is, if there is no ball in either the first ball entry section 33d or the second ball entry section 33e, the main winning process is performed as it is. finish.

Here, the information acquisition process in step S204 will be described with reference to FIG.

(Information acquisition process)
In the information acquisition process, first, in step S301, the number of starting reserved balls N stored in the reserved number storage area FE of the reserved ball storage area 232, specifically, the first ball entry unit 33d and the second ball entry unit 33e. It is determined whether or not the number of start-holding balls N related to the ball entry portion that triggered the information acquisition process is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment). If the start hold storage number N is the upper limit value, the information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the start hold storage number N of the corresponding ball entry portion is incremented by 1 in step S302. At the same time, the total number of holds stored in the hold number storage area FE (hereinafter referred to as the common hold number CRN) is incremented by 1 in step S303.

In the following step S304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS updated in step S103 are set to the first of the free storage area areas of the operation port hold area RE. Is stored in the storage area of, that is, the storage area corresponding to the common hold number CRN incremented by 1 in step S302.

In the following steps S305 and S306, the notification / effect control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side (sub side), indicates that a prize has been generated in the operating ports 33a and 33b (ball entry into the ball entry portions 33d and 33e). The information acquisition process is terminated by executing the confirmation process for the hold notice and the setting process for the hold command, which are the processes for causing the display control device 212 to recognize and execute the hold notice, which will be described later. The hold command includes information on which of the first ball entry section 33d and the second ball entry section 33e is based on winning a prize.

The hold command set in the hold command setting process in step S306 is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process described later. By receiving the hold command, the display control device 212 executes a process for changing the display in the hold number display area Da described above in accordance with the increase in the hold number.

Specifically, when the display control device 212 receives the same command in the display control device 212 via the notification / effect control device 82, the display control device 212 displays the above-mentioned hold display image MP in the hold number display area Da. Execute the process for (for example, adding). In the hold number display area Da, the hold images are sequentially displayed from the left side. For example, if the common hold number CRN is 1, the hold image is displayed in the first unit hold display area Da1 at the left end, and the common hold image is displayed. If the number CRN is 8, the hold image is displayed in the 8th unit hold display area Da8, which is the eighth from the left.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in the normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S401 to S406 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S408 and S409 are executed in the remaining time.

In the normal processing, first, the external signal output processing is executed in step S401. In the external signal output process of step S401, output data such as a timer interrupt process or a command set in the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. Further, when various commands such as a change command, a type command, a change end command, and other effects commands, a hold command, and a shift command, which will be described later, are set, they are transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82. To do.

Next, in step S402, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

In the following step S403, a game turn control process for controlling the game in each game turn is executed. In this game time control process, jackpot determination, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the main display unit 43, and the like are performed.

After executing the game times control process in step S403, the process proceeds to step S404 to execute the game state transition process. Although the details will be described later, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode (high probability game state), and the like by this game state transition process. The details of the game turn control process in step S403 and the game state transition process in step S404 will be described later.

In the following step S405, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34 provided in the operation port unit 33 is executed. In this electric service support process, the electric service is released depending on whether or not the electric service 34 is opened by using the numerical information acquired from the electric service release counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 233 of the RAM 204. A lottery is performed, and when the electric accessory is won in the open state, the electric accessory 34 is opened and closed. In addition, the display control of the accessory display unit 44 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric service opening lottery.

As described above, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are set as the support modes by the electric accessory 34, and the game state transition process shifts to either support mode. Through this process, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204, the high-frequency support mode is set, and when the flag is not set, the low-frequency support mode is set.

In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. Then, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34 is opened is set more than in the case of the low-frequency support mode, and once the electric accessory 34 is in the open state when the electric accessory is won. Set a long opening time. Further, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric accessory open state is won and the electric accessory 34 is opened a plurality of times, the next open state is started after the one open state is completed. The closing time is set to be shorter than the one-time opening time.

By the way, when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode even if the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.

After that, in step S406, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that the launch permission signal is input from the power supply / launch control device 98 (that is, the launch operation is performed). , Excites the solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 53. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

In the following step S407, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached.

That is, in step S408, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 204. Further, in step S409, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is added by 1, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter values are cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 204.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S401 to S406 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, and similarly. The variable type counter CS can also be updated at random.

(Game times control process)
Next, the game rotation control process in step S403 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 13 to 16.

In the game time control process, first, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 13, it is determined in step S501 whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress. When the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the main game rotation is performed without executing any of the processes after step S502, that is, the game rotation start processing of steps S503 to S506 and the game rotation progress processing of steps S507 to S510. End the control process.

If it is not in the open / close execution mode, in step S502, it is determined whether or not the result display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 43 is in the variable display. If the result display unit for the operation port is not displaying the fluctuation, the process proceeds to step S503. In step S503, it is determined whether or not the result display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 43 is in the final display. Specifically, after the variable display is completed, the result display will be continued for a predetermined period. If this confirmation display is performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S503, and the game round control process is terminated. That is, the start of the next game is restricted during the confirmation display.

If a negative determination is made in both steps S502 and S503, the process proceeds to the game round start process of steps S504 to S506. In the game round start process, first, in step S504, it is determined whether or not the total number of start hold balls (common hold number CRN) is "0". When the common hold number CRN is "0", it means that the hold information is not stored in the hold ball storage area 232. Therefore, the game times control process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the common hold number CRN is not "0", the data setting process for setting the data stored in the hold area RE of the hold ball storage area 232 for the variable display is executed in step S505. Further, in step S506, after executing the variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display unit 43 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41, the game round control process is terminated.

Here, the data setting process in step S505 and the fluctuation start process in step S506 will be described in detail. First, the data setting process in step S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Data setting process)
In the data setting process, first, in step S601, one of the start hold ball numbers N stored in the hold number storage area FE, which is the target of the current setting process, and the common hold number CRN are decremented by one. In the following step S602, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the hold area RE is moved to the execution area AE.

After that, in step S603, a process of shifting the data (that is, the hold information) stored in each area Ra1 to Ra8 of the hold area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8 in order to the lower area side, clearing the data of the first area Ra1 and the second area Ra2 → 1st area Ra1, 3rd area Ra3 → 2nd area Ra2, 4th area Ra4 → 3rd area Ra3, 5th area Ra5 → 4th area Ra4, 6th area Ra6 → 5th area Ra5, 7th area Ra7 → The data in each area is shifted such as 6th area Ra6, 8th area Ra8 → 7th area Ra7.

In the following step S604, a shift command is set, which is information for causing the notification / effect control device 82 to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. After that, this data setting process ends. The shift command set in step S604 is transmitted to the display control device 212 via the notification / effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). By receiving the shift command, the display control device 212 executes a process for changing the display in the hold number display area Da for the operation port in accordance with the decrease in the hold number.

(Fluctuation start processing)
Next, the fluctuation start processing in step S506 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the variation start process, first, in step S701, a win / fail determination process for determining whether or not the hold information referred to in the current variation start process corresponds to the jackpot winning is executed. Specifically, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for determining the jackpot, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped. Then, when the winning / failing lottery mode is the low-probability mode, the winning / failing table for the low-probability mode stored in the winning / losing table storage area 221 of the ROM 203 is referred to, and the information grasped above becomes the information corresponding to the jackpot winning. If it is specified whether it is included and the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the above grasped information is a big hit by referring to the winning / failing table for the high probability mode stored in the winning / failing table storage area 221 of the ROM 203. Identify whether it is included in the information corresponding to the winning.

In the following step S702, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination process in step S701 is the result corresponding to the jackpot winning. If the result corresponds to the jackpot winning, the type determination process is executed in step S703.

In the type determination process, the information for type determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Further, with reference to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 222 of the ROM 203, it is specified whether or not the above-identified information for type determination is included in the information corresponding to the type 1 jackpot result. For details, when the hold information corresponds to the entry into the first entry section 33d, the distribution table for the first entry section 33d is referred to, and the hold information is the second entry section 33e. If it corresponds to the entry into the ball, the type is determined by referring to the distribution table for the second entry section 33e.

In the following step S704, it is determined whether or not the type of the current jackpot winning is the type 1 jackpot result based on the information specified in the type determination process in step S703. If it is a first-class jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the first-class jackpot is executed in step S705, and if it is not a first-class jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the second-class jackpot is executed in step S706. Execute result setting process. If it is determined in step S702 that the jackpot is not won, the stop result setting process for the case of a loss is executed in step S707.

In each stop result setting process of steps S705 to S707, information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 is referred to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 203. It is specified, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 204. Further, in step S705 and step S706, various types of information (type 1 jackpot flag or type 2 jackpot flag) for specifying in the MPU 202 that the hit / fail determination result of this game round is a jackpot result are provided in the RAM 204. It is stored in the flag storage area 235.

After executing any of the processes of steps S705 to S707, in step S708, the variable display time setting process for displaying the variable is executed. In the following step S709, a confirmation display time setting process for performing confirmation display based on various information such as the set fluctuation display time is executed.

After executing the variable display time and the confirmed display time setting process in step S708 and step S709, the variable display command and the type command are set in step S710. The fluctuation command includes information on whether or not reach has occurred, information on the fluctuation display time, and information on the confirmed display time. In addition, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes information on the type 1 jackpot result, information on the type 2 jackpot result, information on the missed result, and the like as information on the game result.

The variation command and the type command set in step S710 are transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The notification / effect control device 82 determines the light emission pattern of the indicator lamp unit 63 and the sound output pattern from the speaker unit 64 in the game round based on the received variation command and type command, and determines the output pattern of the sound from the determined effect. The indicator lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled so that the contents are executed. Further, the notification / effect control device 82 transmits the variation command and the type command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 212 grasps the fluctuation display pattern in the symbol display device 41 in the game round based on the received variation command and type command, and the symbol display device so as to execute the grasped variation display pattern. Display control of 41. After that, in step S711, the variation display of the pattern is started on the operation port display unit of the main display unit 43, and then the variation start processing is ended.

Returning to the description of the game round control process (FIG. 13), when the main display unit 43 is in the variable display, the game round progress process of steps S507 to S510 is executed. In the game round progress process, first, in step S507, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation display time information stored in the fluctuation display time counter area of the RAM 204 is "0". As described above, the value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 16). Further, the value of the set fluctuation display time information is decremented (subtracted) by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is activated.

If the variation display time has not elapsed, the variation display process is executed in step S508. In the variable display process, the display mode on the main display unit 43 is changed. After that, the game round control process is terminated.

If the variable display time has elapsed, the confirmation display process is executed in step S509. In the final display process, the information stored in the RAM 204 is specified in any of the processes of steps S705 to S707, and the main display unit is displayed so that the pattern corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43. 43 is controlled and the display state is maintained for the period described above. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the definite display counter (defined display time information) stored in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. The value of the set confirmation display counter is decremented (subtracted) by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is activated. When the value of the confirmation display counter becomes "0", the transition to the next game is allowed.

In the following step S510, the variable end command is set. After that, the game round control process is terminated. The variation end command set in step S510 is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The notification / effect control device 82 transmits the received fluctuation end command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. When the display control device 212 receives the change end command, the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round is confirmed and displayed (final stop display).

(Game state transition process)
Next, the game state transition process in step S404 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the game state transition process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the variation display → the confirmation display on the main display unit 43 (specifically, the result display unit for the operation port) of the game round 1 is completed. If it is not the timing when the confirmation display is completed, the main game state transition process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the confirmation display is finished, in step S803, it is determined whether or not the game result of the current game times corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first-class jackpot flag or the second-class jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

When any of the above flags is stored, in step S804, the round counter area RC provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 has a value determined according to the jackpot type, specifically, a value determined according to the jackpot type. Set "16" for the first-class jackpot and "4" for the second-class jackpot. The round counter area RC is a counter area for counting the number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the open / close execution mode is in progress, an affirmative determination is made in step S801, and the process proceeds to step S805. In step S805, the large winning opening opening / closing process is executed. In the large winning opening opening / closing process, when the large winning opening 32a is closed, the variable winning opening drive unit 32c is set to the driving state on condition that the round counter area RC is "1" or more, and the large winning opening is driven. The mouth 32a is opened. When the large winning opening 32a is open, a predetermined time (30 sec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the opening of the large winning opening 32a, or a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment). On condition that the game balls (pieces) have won a prize, the driving state of the variable winning driving unit 32c is stopped, and the large winning opening 32a is closed.

In the following step S806, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is “0”. If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0", the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the value of the round counter area RC is "0", the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S807.

In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode, and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. In addition, these high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are terminated when the game times are continued a specified number of times (100 times) or when a big hit is won during the specified number of times, and then the winning / losing lottery mode is a low-probability mode. The support mode shifts to the normal gaming state, which is the low frequency support mode.

After that, in step S808, after executing the end processing of the open / close execution mode, the main game state transition process is ended. In the end processing of the open / close execution mode, the jackpot flag stored in the various flag storage areas 235 is erased, and an ending command as a command indicating that the open / close execution mode has ended is output to the notification / effect control device 82. Perform processing.

The notification / effect control device 82 displays a moving image (ending movie) indicating that the opening / closing execution mode ends based on this ending command. This moving image includes information that the open / close execution mode ends and the game shifts to the high-probability game state.

In the present embodiment, a device is devised to suppress the monotonousness of the game progress by changing the progress speed of the game according to the game situation. Here, the variation display time setting process shown in step S708 (see FIG. 15) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Variable display time setting process)
In the variable display time setting process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the winning or losing lottery has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the first special jackpot flag or the second special jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.

If a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, if the result of the winning / failing lottery is a wrong result, the process proceeds to step S902. In step S902, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated by the symbol display device 41 in this game round. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, an affirmative determination is made in step S902 as the occurrence of reach display. When specifying the presence / absence of reach occurrence using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to.

If an affirmative determination is made in either step S901 or step S902, the process proceeds to step S903, and the current variation is referred to by the reach generation variation display time table stored in the display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203. Fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the type counter CS is acquired, and in the following step S904, the fluctuation display time information is transmitted to the fluctuation display time counter area (variation display time measuring means) provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. Set to. After that, this setting process ends.

That is, in the present embodiment, the reach display is executed when the result of the winning / failing lottery is the jackpot winning result or when the result of the winning / failing lottery is out of order and the lottery for generating reach is won. ing.

Here, the reach display is provided with a normal reach display and a super reach display in which the variable display modes are different from each other. In the variation display time table for reach generation, variation display time information corresponding to each of the normal reach display and the super reach display is set, and by referring to the table, the variation display time information corresponding to each reach display can be obtained. To be acquired. Regarding the determination of the reach display type, a table corresponding to the reach display type and the value of the variable type counter CS is provided, and by referring to the table, the value of the variable type counter CS this time can be used. The corresponding reach display is determined.

More specifically, the variation display time table for reach generation corresponds to the type of jackpot. Specifically, in the case of the type 1 jackpot result, the variable display time is set so that the combination of specific symbols can be stopped and displayed, and in the case of the type 2 jackpot result, the combination of non-specific symbols is displayed. The variable display time is set so that the stop display can be performed. Incidentally, the reference variable display time table for reach generation is common to both the normal gaming state and the high-accuracy gaming state.

Returning to the description of step S902, if a negative determination is made in step S902, the process proceeds to step S905. In step S905, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the highly accurate gaming state. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S905, the process proceeds to step S906, and the variation type counter of this time is referred to in the variation display time table for non-reach generation corresponding to the high probability gaming state stored in the display time table storage area 223. The fluctuation display time corresponding to the value of CS is acquired, and the fluctuation display time information is set in the fluctuation display time counter area in step S906. After that, this setting process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S905, the process proceeds to step S907, and the variation type of this time is referred to with reference to the variation display time table for non-reach generation corresponding to the normal game state stored in the display time table storage area 223. The fluctuation display time corresponding to the value of the counter CS is acquired, and the fluctuation display time information is set in the fluctuation display time counter area in step S906. After that, this setting process ends.

The variable display time information when reach does not occur is set so that the larger the number of common hold number CRNs, the shorter the variable display time. In particular, when the game is in the high-probability game state (support mode is the high-frequency support mode), the number of pending information is the same as when the normal game state (support mode is the low-frequency support mode). The variation display time table for non-reach is set so that a shorter variation display time is selected in comparison in some cases.

As described above, the variation display time of each game is set with the presence / absence of reach occurrence, the type of reach display, the number of stored pending information (the number of subsequent pending information), the value of the variation type counter CS, and the like as parameters. It is determined (so-called time saving function). However, the variable display time of each game is set with the contents of other reserved information, specifically, the information for jackpot determination, the information for type determination, and the information for reach determination included in the other reserved information as parameters. Determined without doing.

In recent years, some pachinko machines are set so that the number of prize balls related to the ball entry section to which the electric accessory is attached is "3" or more. In this type of game machine, the electric accessory picks up a lot of game balls, so that the player can be given more benefits than expected. Therefore, in order to avoid such an event, the opening time in the high-frequency winning mode is suppressed so that the number of balls entering the electric accessory is not excessive, and the variable display time per game is adjusted accordingly. The degree of shortening of is determined. That is, suppressing the occurrence of ball entry is a factor that hinders the shortening of the variable display time. Further, in such a configuration, it is possible to increase the number of balls held in a highly accurate game state by launching a game ball in accordance with the opening of the electric accessory by technical intervention such as so-called stop striking. If such an action becomes easy, there is a concern that the function of improving the digestion speed will not be utilized well and the speedy progress of the game will not be realized.

Here, in the present embodiment, as already described, the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second entry section 33e is set to "1". By setting the number of prize balls for the entry of "1" to "1", the opening time of the electric accessory 34 is almost doubled (about "6 sec" in the present embodiment) as compared with the conventional game machine. Even if it is configured to be left as it is, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a privilege exceeding the above-mentioned assumption. That is, even if most of the launched game balls enter the electric accessory 34 → the second entry unit 33e, the above-mentioned inconvenience caused by the configuration does not occur. Therefore, the above-mentioned time saving function can be suitably exerted, and the digestion speed of the hold in the highly accurate gaming state can be improved.

However, as the variable display time is shortened, the ratio of the fixed display time to the time related to one game is increased. In the first place, the fixed display time is provided to clearly indicate the game result to the player and to clarify the boundary with the subsequent game times, and the presence of this fixed display time stands out is the degree of attention to the game. It is not preferable to improve the above. In addition, the existence of the definite display time can be a hindrance in improving the digestion speed in the high-probability game state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a device is devised to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience caused by the confirmation display time while ensuring the significance of existence. Hereinafter, the setting process of the fixed display time shown in step S709 (see FIG. 15) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Confirmed display time setting process)
In the confirmation display time setting process, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the highly accurate gaming state. If a negative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that the game is in a normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step S1002.

In step S1002, the first count value (corresponding to “1.0 sec”) is set in the fixed display time counter area (fixed display time measuring means) provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. As a result, the fixed display time becomes the first fixed display time "1.0 sec".

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that the gaming state is high, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1003, it is determined whether or not the game time to be executed is the final game time in the high-probability game state, that is, the game time that triggers the transition to the normal game state (the 100th game time in the present embodiment). To do.

If a negative determination is made in step S1003, the process proceeds to step S1004. In step S1004, it is determined whether or not the game is a super reach compatible game based on the result of the variation display time setting process in step S708. When a negative determination is made in step S1004, a second count value (“0.”) smaller than the first count value is set in the fixed display time counter area (fixed display time measuring means) provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. (Equivalent to "8 sec") is set. As a result, the final display time becomes "0.8 sec".

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1002, and the first count value (“1.0 sec”) is set in the fixed display time counter area (fixed display time measuring means) provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. "Equivalent to) is set. As a result, the fixed display time becomes the first fixed display time "1.0 sec".

That is, in the high-probability game state, when the super reach is not performed, the fixed display time is basically shortened from the first fixed display time "1.0 sec" to the second fixed display time "0.8 sec". However, when the super reach is performed, the first fixed display time "1.0 sec" remains as in the normal game state. The information regarding the fixed display time set in this way is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 through the above-mentioned variable command.

(About the electrical configuration of the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212)
Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 5, the electrical configuration of the notification / effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 will be supplementarily described.

The MPU 242 is mounted on the notification / effect control board 241 provided in the notification / effect control device 82. The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 242, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 243 is executed. A certain RAM 244 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are built in. It is not essential that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 242, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to the MPU of other control devices.

The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242, and the game turn control commands (game turn control information) such as the variation command, the type command, and the variation end command already explained from the main control device 81 are transmitted. Receive. In addition, it receives hold display control commands (hold display control information) such as shift commands and hold commands, and open / close execution mode commands (open / close execution mode information) such as opening commands and ending commands.

As described above, the hold lamp unit 47 provided in the variable display unit 36, the display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 provided in the front door frame 14, and the display control device 212 are connected to the output side of the MPU 242. ing. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 81 to the notification / effect control device 82 are transmitted to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form as it is.

The display control device 212 includes a display control board on which an MPU, a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, and a video RAM, which are elements in which a program ROM and a work RAM are combined into chips, are mounted. The MPU of the display control device 212 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 81 via the notification / effect control device 82, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP (specifically). Is to generate an internal command for VDP). More specifically, the MPU executes a process of grasping the variation display pattern of each game time in the symbol display device 41 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 81 via the notification / effect control device 82. At the same time, the drawing process for the VDP 255 is executed according to the process result. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41.

The program ROM is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for a background image. The work RAM is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU. These work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since VDP is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP adjusts the timings of the MPU, the video RAM, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 256 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the outline of the variation display mode of the symbol on the display screen 41a is specified by the notification / effect control device 82 with reference to the command from the main control device 81, and based on the specific result. The details of the variable display mode are grasped by the display control device 212. Specifically, in the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82, the variation display control process is executed as a part of the periodic process started in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec), and the variation display of the symbol is displayed by this variation display control process. The outline of the aspect is specified. Here, the variation display control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Variable display control processing)
In the variation display control process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the game is being played, that is, whether or not the symbol display device 41 is executing the variation display to the final display of the symbols for one game. If it is determined that the game is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1102, and it is determined whether or not the variation command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received.

If a negative determination is made in step S1102, the variation display control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, the variation start processing is executed in step S1103, and then the variation display control process is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S1101, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, that is, if it is determined that the game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation end command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received. If a negative determination is made in step S1104, the variable display control process ends after the variable intermediate processing is executed in step S1105. The variable mid-use process is a process of executing various effects and changing the determined effect in the game times started by the variable start process.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1104, the process proceeds to step S1106, the variation end process is executed in step S1106, and then the variation display control process ends. The variation end processing is a process of ending (confirming display) the variation display of the symbol and the effect being executed so as to correspond to the hold information related to the game times. In such a process, the speaker unit 64 and the lamp unit 63 are driven and controlled to produce a fanning or the like corresponding to the final display. Then, after outputting the confirmation command to the display control device 212, the process for ending the fluctuation is terminated. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) by the symbol display device 41 based on the received confirmation command.

(Process for starting fluctuation)
Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 20, the variation start process of step S1103 will be supplementarily described. The variation start process is a process for starting the effect for game rounds based on the reception of the variation command transmitted from the main control device 81. In the fluctuation start processing, the reach display and the like are set as the effect for the game round.

In the fluctuation start processing, first, the fluctuation command received this time in step S1201 is read, and the information on the presence / absence of reach occurrence, the information on the fluctuation display time, and the information on the final display time are specified from the command. As described above, when the variable command is transmitted from the main control unit 81, the type command is also transmitted. In step S1201, the type command received together with the variable command received this time is read, and the game result information such as the type 1 jackpot result information, the type 2 jackpot result information, or the deviation result information is obtained from the command. Identify. Then, in step S1201, from the above-specified information, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the type of jackpot if the jackpot has been won, information on whether or not a reach has occurred if the jackpot has not been won, and information on the fluctuation display time. Information and information on the confirmed display time are grasped, and the grasped information is stored in the register of the MPU 242.

In the following step S1202, based on the information grasped in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game times started this time is the game result corresponding to the jackpot result. In the case of a jackpot result, that is, a type 1 jackpot result or a type 2 jackpot result, the effect setting process for the jackpot is executed in the following step S1203.

In the effect setting process for big hits, the stop result (symbol combination) for big hits is determined (stop result determination process is performed). In the stop result determination process, in the case of the first type jackpot result, the stop result in which the same specific symbol (main symbol with an odd number) is combined on one effective line L1 to L5 is obtained in this game. Determined as the result of stopping times. Further, in the case of the second type jackpot result, the stop result in which the same combination of non-specific symbols (main symbols with even numbers) is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is stopped in this game. Determine as a result.

The type of main symbol and the effective lines L1 to L5 that are stopped and displayed when a big hit result is obtained are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of the ROM 243, and the final stop line determined by the above processing is the final stop provided in the RAM 244. It is stored as address information in the line address storage area. At this time, the process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area is executed. In the following description, the address information of the stop result determined by the various stop result determination processes is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 244.

Further, in the effect setting process for the jackpot, the variable display mode of the symbol for the jackpot is determined (the variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) is performed). As already explained, when a big hit result is obtained, the result is notified via a reach display. In the variation display mode determination process for reach display, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 243 is acquired, and the game in the variation display time and type command of the variation command received this time. The effect pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the result is determined. In addition, a process of storing the determined address information of the variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 244 is executed. Also in the variable display mode determination process shown below, the corresponding variable display pattern table is acquired from the variable display pattern table storage area of the ROM 243, and the effect pattern corresponding to the variable display time and the game result is determined. Then, the address information of the effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determination process is stored in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 244.

If it is determined in step S1202 that the result is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is grasped whether or not reach occurs in this game round. When reach occurs, the process proceeds to step S1205, and the effect setting process for generating reach is executed. In the effect setting process for generating reach, the outline of the effect and the combination of the symbols to be finally stopped are determined. Since the former is the same as the process of step S1203, the description is incorporated. Since this process corresponds to the out-of-reach, the stop result (symbol combination) is determined so that the symbol combination does not correspond to the jackpot result. That is, the stop result in which the combination of the off-reach symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of this time. In this case, the type of combination of the out-reach symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, in this determination, the same symbol combination is not established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the symbol of the middle symbol row Z2, which is the same as the symbol forming the reach line, is set with respect to the reach line. The stop result on the effective line is determined so that the final stop is made at the stop position shifted before or after. After that, the process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area is executed.

If it is determined in step S1204 that no reach has occurred, the process proceeds to step S1206. In step S1206, a combination of the outline of the effect for normal deviation and the symbol to be finally stopped is determined. Since this process corresponds to complete deviation, the stop symbol is determined so that the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is not formed.

After executing any of the processes of step S1203, step S1205, and step S1206, the process proceeds to step S1207 to perform the confirmation display setting process. In the confirmation display setting process, the confirmation display time is set based on the information grasped in step S1101, and the variable display of each symbol sequence that is stopped is regulated at least until the confirmation display time elapses.

In the following step S1208, commands including stop result and effect pattern information (variation display to confirmation display) determined in steps S1203, step S1205, and step S1206 are output to the display control device 212 as stop result commands and pattern commands, respectively. Execute the process to be performed. The MPU of the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 in order to execute the effect in the current game round based on the received stop result command and pattern command.

After executing the process of step S1208, in the following step S1209, after executing the process of starting the effect for the game round, the process for starting the variation is ended. Specifically, the drive control of the speaker unit 64 and the lamp unit 63 is started based on the effect patterns determined in step S1203, step S1205, and step S1206 to start the effect for game rotation.

Here, a variation display mode of the symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41 (display screen 41a) will be supplementarily described based on FIG. FIG. 21 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the types of variable display modes, and FIG. 21 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an outline of each variable display mode.

(Variable display mode)
As shown in FIG. 21A, the variable display mode of the symbol executed on the display screen 41a is roughly classified into five modes: complete deviation, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, and super reach B. Each of these variable display modes is set so that the variable display time is different, and the outline of the variable display mode for each game is grasped based on the information given to the command from the main control device 81 and related to the variable display time. It is possible.

Specifically, the fluctuation display time of complete deviation is "0.8 sec to 8 sec" (the difference is set according to the game state and the number of holds), the fluctuation display time of normal reach A is "10 sec", and the normal reach. The fluctuation display time of B is "15 sec", which is longer than the fluctuation display time of normal reach A, the fluctuation display time of super reach A is "16 sec", which is longer than the fluctuation display time of normal reach A and B, and the fluctuation display of super reach B. The time is "17 sec", which is longer than the variable display time of Super Reach A. For example, when the information regarding the fluctuation display time given to the command from the main control device 81 is "15 sec", it is understood that the normal reach B should be executed by the notification / effect control device 82. ..

When the reach display is executed, the variable display time set in the normal gaming state and the variable display time set in the high probability gaming state are common. That is, for example, when "16 sec" is set, Super Reach A is executed regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, in the case of complete deviation, the variable display time changes according to the gaming state. As described above, the support mode by the electric accessory 34 is switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode in the high probability gaming state. Therefore, in the high-probability game state, the probability of entering the ball into the operating port 33b increases, and the frequency of acquiring the hold information increases. In consideration of such circumstances, it is devised so that the time saving function (so-called time saving function) at the time of complete disconnection is remarkably exhibited in the high probability gaming state.

Specifically, in the normal gaming state, when the number of holds is "8" to "4", "3 sec" is set as the variable display time, and when the number of holds is "3" or "2". “4 sec to 6 sec” is set as the variable display time, and “7 sec to 8 sec” is set as the variable display time when the number of holds is “1” or “0”. On the other hand, in the high-probability game state, "0.8 sec" is set when the number of holdings is "8" to "1", and "7 sec to 8 sec" is set when the number of holds is "0". ..

In the game times corresponding to the jackpot result, it is easier to select in the order of Super Reach B ＞ Super Reach A ＞ Normal Reach B ＞ Normal Reach A. The configuration is such that it is easy to select in the order of B> Super Reach A> Super Reach B. In other words, the higher the variable display time, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot.

Here, the variation display mode of the normal reach A and B will be described with reference to FIG. 21 (b1). When normal reach A and B are selected, first, the variation display (scroll display) of all the symbol columns that are stopped and displayed is started, and then the variation display of the symbols in the upper symbol sequence Z1 is ended (stop). Display), and end (stop display) the variation display of the symbol in the lower symbol column Z3. In this way, in the state where the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped and displayed, the main symbols with the same numbers are stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 6), so that the reach line is reached. Is formed. Then, in the situation where the reach line is formed, the variation display of the symbol string Z2 in the middle row is performed, so that the reach display (reach variation display) is obtained. After the reach display is displayed, the variable display ends by stopping and displaying the symbol column Z2 in the middle row. Then, when the same symbol as the symbol constituting the reach display stops on the reach line, it is notified that the jackpot has been won, and when the other symbols stop on the reach line, the jackpot is won. You will be notified that you have not done so. In this way, the combination of the symbols displayed as the final stop is maintained as it is for a predetermined period. That is, the current game round continues until the stop display period elapses, and the transition to the next game round is allowed after the stop display period elapses.

In the present embodiment, the difference in the variable display time between the normal reach A and the normal reach B is secured by setting the difference in the variable display time of the middle symbol row Z2 after the reach line is formed. The method of setting the difference between the two is arbitrary. For example, it is possible to secure the difference in the fluctuation display time by setting the difference in the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the formation of the reach line.

Next, the variable display modes of the super reach A and B will be described based on the variable display modes of the normal reach A and B described above. As shown in FIGS. 21 (b2) and 21 (b3), the above-mentioned reach lines are formed for the super reach A and B through the same process as the normal reach A and B. Then, after forming the reach line, the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character as a moving image in addition to the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2. Specifically, in Super Reach A, after the reach line is formed, a character imitating a fairy is displayed in the center of the variable display area (center of the variable display area ME) of the middle symbol sequence Z2, and in Super Reach B. After the reach line is formed, a character imitating a girl is displayed in the center of the variable display area (center of the variable display area ME) of the middle symbol sequence Z2.

Here, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 22, the flow of the display effect in the game times executed in the highly accurate game state will be illustrated.

In the example shown in FIG. 22, the game round is started at the timing of ta1. With the start of the game round, the variable display of the symbol sequence that has been stopped and displayed on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41 is started. The number of reservations when the game round is started at the timing of ta1 is "8", and the number of reservations is subtracted from "8" to "7" with the start of the game round. In the example of FIG. 22, since the game times are in a highly reliable game state, the number of holdings is "8" (1 or more), and the game is completely out of alignment, "0.8 sec" is set as the variable display time. Will be done. At the timing of ta2, where 0.8 sec has elapsed from the timing of ta1, the variable display of the symbols ends, and the display shifts to the final display in which all the symbol strings are stopped and displayed.

In the high-probability game state, the second fixed display time "0.8 sec" is set as the fixed display time when the special display such as the reach display is not performed. Therefore, the confirmation display is continued from the timing of ta2 to the timing of ta3 when 0.8 sec has elapsed. At the timing of ta3, the confirmation display ends, and the restriction on the start of the next game round is lifted.

The game times started at the timing of ta3 correspond to the reach display (specifically, Super Reach B). In this game round, the variation display of the symbol starts at the timing of ta3, and the normal variation display is switched to the reach display at the timing of ta4. After that, at the timing of ta5, a character (image) imitating a girl appears from the lower end of the display screen 41a, and the character (image) imitating a girl appears and steps up as if the normal reach was shifted to the super reach B in appearance.

The character appears from below the display screen 41a and is displaced to a predetermined effect position set in the center of the display screen 41a. Then, the variable display of the symbol is performed according to the movement of the character (the action of the character) that has reached the predetermined effect position. That is, when the effect is performed by the character, the start display for arranging the character at a predetermined effect position is passed, and a certain period (about 1.0 sec in the present embodiment) is provided for this start display. It is a required configuration.

Here, there is a normal reach B that is compatible with a fanning effect that incorporates a fanning effect that does not shift to the super reach B, pretending to shift to the super reach B. Specifically, although the head of a character imitating a girl is displayed from the lower end of the display screen 41a at the timing after the transition to the reach display, the display screen 41a does not reach the predetermined effect position. There is a case where the effect of disappearing (retracting) is performed at the lower end of.

As described above, by configuring the character to be displaced to a predetermined effect position over time, the player can be expected to step up to the super reach B higher than the normal reach B. Providing such a branch and securing the time to visually confirm whether or not the step-up is possible is advantageous in increasing the degree of attention to the display effect, and is also a preferable configuration in suppressing the monotonousness of the display effect. ..

In addition, for some of the character images (specifically, costumes: swimsuits), multiple colors are set, and the expectation of big hits is set to increase in the order of "blue" <"green" <"red". Has been done. Here, the color of this costume becomes visible when the character rises to an intermediate position between the predetermined effect position and the retracted position. In the case of the above-mentioned fanning effect, the character retracts before reaching the intermediate position (when the branching position is reached), and the fanning effect ends.

After the character crosses the branch position and the step-up to Super Reach B is confirmed, the player confirms the color of the costume in the hope that this Super Reach B is more promising. Is assumed. According to such a start display, the effect of gradually increasing the expectation of the player by the stepwise change is exhibited, and it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the attention to the display effect.

After the timing of ta6 when the start display is changed to the action display, the scroll display is continued according to the movement of the character image, and the symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of ta7 when the variable display ends. As a result, the winning / failing information (the result of the loss in FIG. 22) in the game is clearly shown.

When the confirmation display is started at the timing of ta7, the end display for retracting the character displayed at the predetermined effect position is performed. Specifically, the fixed display time is used to lower the character to the lower end of the display screen 41a to leave (hide) the display screen 41a. In this way, by performing the end display using the fixed display time, it is possible to suppress the pressure on the variable display time in the game times.

In the present embodiment, the fixed display time in the high-probability game state is set to be shorter than that in the normal game state, but the case where the reach display is performed is an exception, and the normal game The same fixed display time as the state is applied. As a result, the confirmation display is continued from the timing of ta7 to the timing of ta9 when 1.0 sec has elapsed.

The time required for the end display is set to be equivalent to the time required for the final display (1.0 sec). As a result, it is possible to share information (specifically, a program stored in ROM 243 or the like) related to the display effect (particularly the end display) in both the normal game state and the high-probability game state.

As described above, the high-probability game state shifts to the normal game state by executing a predetermined number of game times (100 times) without winning a big hit in the high-probability game state. When shifting to the normal gaming state, an effect indicating the transition from the high probability gaming state to the normal gaming state is executed by using the confirmed display time of the last game to be executed in the high probability gaming state. It is composed.

More specifically, the background image displayed on the display screen 41a and the BGM output from the speaker unit 64 are different between the high-probability gaming state and the normal gaming state. More specifically, in the normal game state, the background image displayed on the display screen 41a is based on "blue", and a low-tempo BGM is adopted. On the other hand, in the high-accuracy game state, the background image displayed on the display screen 41a is based on "red", and the BGM also has a higher tempo than the one corresponding to the normal game state.

In this way, the difference between the normal gaming state and the high-accuracy gaming state is emphasized by giving a visual / auditory difference, that is, by differentiating the stay stage. Changes in the gaming state are greatly related to the interests of the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by performing an effect for switching the stage according to the change of the staying stage, it is easy to understand that the stage is switched and it is difficult to overlook it. Hereinafter, a device for executing the effect will be described.

Explaining again with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 18, in step S1001, it is determined that the high-probability gaming state is (affirmative determination), and in step S1003, the final game round that triggers the end of the high-probability gaming state, specifically. When it is determined (affirmative judgment) that the number of game times executed in the high-probability game state has reached the specified number of times, or the end condition has been satisfied by winning a jackpot during the high-probability game state. Goes to step S1006. In step S1006, the first count value (corresponding to "1.0 sec") and the second count value ("0.8 sec") are placed in the fixed display time counter area (fixed display time measuring means) provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. A third count value larger than (corresponding to) is set. As a result, the fixed display time is expanded to the third fixed display time "1.2 sec".

On the display screen 41a and the speaker unit 64 of the symbol display device 41, it is a condition that it is the final game number in the high probability game state, that is, the third confirmed display time "1.2 sec" is set as the confirmed display time. As a result, the display effect related to the change of the stay stage described above will be performed. Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23, a stage display process executed as a part of the periodic process by the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82 will be described.

(Process for stage display)
In the stage display process, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the open / close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending command input from the main control device 81 is input. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, the process of step S1302 is executed, and then the stage display process is terminated.

In step S1302, a stage display process corresponding to a highly accurate gaming state is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, as a part of the ending display indicating the end of the open / close execution mode, the display effect indicating the transition to the stage corresponding to the high probability gaming state is executed.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1303. In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is high. If a negative determination is made in step S1303, the stage display process is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1303, the process proceeds to step S1304. In step S1304, it is determined whether or not a variation command has been received from the main control device 81. If a negative determination is made in step S1304, the stage display process is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1304, the process proceeds to step S1305. In step S1305, it is determined whether or not the end condition of the high probability gaming state (number of games → 100 times or jackpot winning) is satisfied. If a negative determination is made in step S1305, the display content update process is executed in step S1306, and then the stage display process ends. In the high-probability gaming state in the present embodiment, the remaining number of times that the player can stay in the stage is clearly indicated. By executing the update process in step S1306, the remaining number of times displayed on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41 is updated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1305, the process proceeds to step S1307 to determine whether or not the establishment of the end condition of the high-probability gaming state is triggered by the arrival of the specified number of times. If a negative determination is made in step S1307, the process proceeds to step S1309 and a process for executing the opening / closing execution mode opening interlocking effect is performed. Specifically, the display effect is set so that the display effect that leads to the opening display is executed as an effect that clearly indicates the transition to the open / close execution mode while the final display is being executed. If the above two conditions are satisfied at the same time as the end condition of the high probability gaming state, the jackpot winning is prioritized and the process of step S1309 is executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1307, that is, if it is determined that the high-probability gaming state ends when the specified number of times is reached, the process of step S1308 is executed, and then the stage display process ends. In step S1308, a stage display process for displaying the stage corresponding to the normal gaming state is executed. As a result, a display effect for switching the stage is performed while the final display is being performed.

Here, the flow of stage switching will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 24. From the timing of tb1 to the timing of tb2, the confirmation display of the game times corresponding to the complete deviation is executed, and the game shifts to the next game time at the timing of tb2. Here, the remaining number of high-probability gaming states displayed in the upper right of the display screen 41a is updated. Specifically, the counter display is updated from "99/100" to "100/100". As a result, it is clarified that it is the final game round in the high probability game state.

In the example of FIG. 24, since the final game round is also completely out of alignment and the subsequent hold information is stored at this point, the second confirmed display time "0.8" sec is set as the variable display time. Will be done. At the timing of tb3, where 0.8 sec has elapsed from the timing of tb2, the symbol combination corresponding to the complete deviation is stopped and displayed, and the normal variable display is changed to the confirmed display. At the timing of tb4, where 0.6 sec has passed from the timing of tb3, images imitating shutters (hereinafter, simply referred to as shutters) are displayed on the left and right of the display screen 41a, and these shutters are displayed in front of the gaming machine in the stopped symbol. Although it is displayed so as to overlap with each other, it is configured so that the stopped symbols can be visually recognized through the shutter.

The shutter is closed at the timing of tb5 when a time (0.8 sec) equal to the normal confirmed display time has elapsed from the timing of tb3, and this state is continued for a certain period of time. During this continuation (specifically, the timing of tb5 to the timing of tb6), the background image described above is changed from "red" to "blue" and the counter display is hidden. In addition, the BGM output is temporarily stopped from the timing of tb5 to the timing of tb6, resulting in a silent state.

At the timing of tb6, the shutter is displaced from the closed position to the open position (non-display position). As a result, the background image changed to "blue" becomes visible, and the timing of tb7 when the shutter is completely opened, specifically, the timing of tb7 when the third final display time "1.2 sec" has elapsed from the timing of tb3. The next game round in the normal game state will start at. Along with this, the output of the BGM corresponding to the normal gaming state is started.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the high accuracy gaming state (high accuracy stage) is shifted to the normal gaming state (normal stage) with the low identification state in which the discriminating power of the symbol or the background is reduced by the shutter. It suppresses giving the player the impression that the stage has changed suddenly.

In addition, the second finalized display time "0.8 sec", which is the reference time in the high-probability game state, and the first finalized display time "1.", which is the reference time in the normal game state. By setting it longer than "0 sec", the rhythm of the game progress is changed. It is preferable to generate such a change in rhythm by using a relatively long fixed display time in order to secure the execution time of the display effect related to the above-mentioned stage change.

According to the first embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

As the game progresses, the symbols are variably displayed on the display screen 41a, and the combination of the symbols according to the lottery result of the big hit is stopped and displayed on the display screen 41a. In view of such a basic configuration of the game machine, it is assumed that the player's attention is exclusively directed to the variable display such as the combination of the symbols finally specified and the reach display executed in the process. Here, in the game machine shown in the present embodiment, by adopting a so-called time saving function that shortens the time for executing the variable display and various reach displays, the game progress is sharpened and the degree of attention to the game is improved. It is planned.

Here, in the conventional game machine, various measures have been taken for the mode of the variable display as in the game machine shown in the present embodiment, but the final display for displaying the game result is the result of the grant determination. This confirmed display time was uniform because it only promoted grasping and functioned as a delimiter for the next game.

The uniform fixed display time in this way can hinder the function of avoiding the monotony of the game. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, by changing the fixed display time, the rhythm of the game is given by changing the game progress in accordance with the game situation (for example, the normal game state / high probability game state). Can be changed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the monotonousness of the game and contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

In particular, the fixed display time is relatively long in the normal game state in which the variable display time is set to be relatively long, and the fixed display time is also relatively short in the high probability game state in which the variable display time is set to be relatively short. By changing the fixed display time by linking (harmonizing) with the variable display time in this way, for example, the above-mentioned slow / fast difference is generated by utilizing the entire game times composed of the variable display time and the fixed display time. It is possible to preferably exert the above effect.

By making the definite display time extremely short or extremely long, it is possible to further emphasize the slowness and speed. However, when consideration is given to the original significance of the definite display time (clarification of the game result), the extreme difference in the definite display time hinders the effective exertion of the effect of providing the definite display time.

In this respect, the above effect can be suitably exhibited by guaranteeing the difference together with the variable display time instead of guaranteeing the difference by the fixed display time alone. In particular, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by suppressing the contribution rate of the definite display time to avoid an excessive change in causing such a difference. That is, when the game time related to one game is configured by the variable display time and the confirmed display time, the confirmed display time becomes excessively short, making it difficult to confirm the game result or extending the confirmed display time. It is possible to clarify the difference between the digestion speed of the reserved information in the normal gaming state and the digestion speed of the reserved information in the high probability gaming state while suppressing the decrease in the attention of the player.

By setting the variable display time that constitutes one game time longer than the fixed display time, the original function of the game machine is to show the process until the result of hit or miss is clearly shown and to improve the interest of the player. By setting the fixed display time in the normal game state> the variable display time in the high-probability game state> the fixed display time in the high-probability game state, the digestion speed of the reserved information in the normal game state and the digestion speed of the hold information in the normal game state in the entire game times, It is possible to preferably differentiate from the digestion speed of the reserved information in the high probability gaming state.

Not only does the degree of advantage change due to changes in the gaming state, but the final display time also changes according to the gaming state. By causing a difference in the flow of the game in this way, it is possible to more preferably suppress the monotonization of the game.

Further, when it is desired to accelerate the progress of the game by exerting the so-called time saving function in the highly accurate game state, the existence of the fixed display time may be an obstacle. In this respect, by shortening the confirmed display time in the highly accurate game state, it is possible to contribute to the enhancement of the time saving function.

In particular, in the highly accurate gaming state, which is advantageous for the player, the expectation for the jackpot winning is higher than in the normal gaming state. At this time, the delay in the favorable situation can be a factor that gives the player the impression that the jackpot winning is unnecessarily delayed. This hinders the player from maintaining expectations for a highly accurate gaming state (big hit winning). Therefore, in a situation where expectations for a big hit have increased, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by shortening the confirmation display time and accelerating the progress of the game as described above.

If there is an upper limit on the number of memorable hold information, the existence of the upper limit may cause a ball entry that does not correspond to the acquisition of the hold information. Since the right to win or fail lottery cannot be obtained with such a ball, the waste becomes larger than that with a normal ball. Under these circumstances, there is a high possibility that the player will play the game while suppressing the investment (launch) of the game ball by so-called stop hitting. In this case, the effect of accelerating the game progress due to the high-probability game state (high-frequency support mode) cannot be exerted well. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, by shortening the confirmation display time in the high-frequency support mode in which a large number of balls are likely to be entered, the above-mentioned waste is suppressed and the game progresses by the player. It can contribute to the suppression of delay. Therefore, it is possible to preferably exert the effect of switching the mode and emphasizing the speed of the game progress.

In the high-frequency support mode, in which the ball is likely to enter the operation port 33b, the variable display time is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode to promote the digestion of the reserved information, so that the game can be played while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. You can proceed quickly. Here, by setting the number of prize balls based on the entry into the operating port 33b to "1", it is possible to suppress the increase in the number of balls held during the high frequency support mode due to the increase in the entry rate. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of reserved information stored in the high-frequency support mode from becoming "0", and since a certain amount of ball entry can be expected, the variable display time and the variable display time in consideration of the ball entry rate It is possible to avoid restrictions on shortening the fixed display time. Therefore, it can contribute to further strengthening of the above-mentioned time saving function.

In the present embodiment, in particular, when a specific display effect (super reach A or super reach B) is performed even in the high frequency winning mode, the same fixed display time as in the normal gaming state is applied, and the said Shortening of the confirmation display time will be regulated. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as insufficient time for end display required when ending a specific display effect and the end display not being smoothly performed.

Specifically, if the completion of the end display is ignored and the production character is forcibly moved to the next game while the production character is being evacuated, the production is forcibly terminated while the production character is being evacuated. A feeling of strangeness may occur. For example, the forced termination can be avoided by shortening the time required for the end display by fast-forwarding or the like, but in such a measure, the evacuation speed changes significantly due to the influence of the shortening of the stop display period. Therefore, it is expected that it will be difficult to suppress the occurrence of visual discomfort. In addition, information for realizing such a special display mode becomes indispensable, and the storage area related to the effect may be compressed. In this respect, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a sense of discomfort in the display mode when the specific display effect ends (end display) due to the common use of the specific display effect. .. Further, even if the fixed display time is not shortened only when a specific display effect is performed, the specific display effect is not executed every game in the first place. Therefore, the above-mentioned acceleration effect of the game progress is not significantly reduced. Further, it is no longer necessary to store the end display mode for each mode in order to standardize the specific display effect, and it is possible to avoid unnecessary increase in the storage capacity of the notification / effect control device 82 and the display control device 212. Will be done.

When the display effect dedicated to the high-probability game state is executed in the high-probability game state (high-frequency winning mode), the fixed display time is not shortened, but rather longer than the fixed display time in the normal game state. By extending to, the fluctuation range of the stop display period can be increased. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the game that has been progressing rapidly up to that point has been braked, and it is possible to contribute to the occurrence of slowness and speed as the game progresses.

For example, it is possible to increase the speed by lengthening the variable display time, but by extending the definite display time, which has little change in the first place, it is possible to avoid weakening the impression of the occurrence of the speed. As a result, the above effect is preferably exhibited.

In the configuration in which the display effect for switching the game state is executed when the number of lottery reaches the specified number (100 times), the stage corresponding to the high-probability game state is changed to the stage corresponding to the normal game state through the display effect. Fall. Here, when switching from the high-probability game state to the normal game state occurs, the stage (game state) is suddenly staged (game state) by lengthening the fixed display time and performing a display effect for stage fall at the fixed display time. It is possible to suppress giving the player the impression that) has been switched.

<Second Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the fixed display time is changed according to the normal gaming state / high probability gaming state, but in the present embodiment, it is based on the stored subsequent hold information. It differs from the first embodiment in that the fixed display time is changed. Specifically, by using the change in the fixed display time for the effect related to the hold notice suggesting the content of the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204, the player's attention to the fixed display is reduced. It suppresses doing. Hereinafter, the outline of the pending notice will be described first, and then the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(About hold notice)
In the present embodiment, the effect related to the hold notice suggesting the content of the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 has a predetermined probability before the game round related to the hold information is started. It is configured to be executed in. The effect corresponding to the hold information that has not yet been the subject of the lottery is executed at a timing before the game times related to the hold information. According to the above configuration, not only the game for confirming the lottery result of the hold information corresponding to the game times currently in progress, but also the result when the hold information to be the lottery target later becomes the lottery target is included in the content of the above effect. A game of confirming or predicting according to the situation is added, and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

The hold notices include (1) a first-class hold notice executed (during the fluctuation display time) in accordance with the fluctuation display of the above-mentioned symbol in the fluctuation display area ME of the display screen 41a, and (2) a stop display. Type 2 hold notice executed in association with the final display time of the symbol combination, (3) Type 3 hold notice executed in accordance with the change in the mode of hold display in the hold display area NE of the display screen 41a. It is set. Hereinafter, a configuration that is a prerequisite for the hold notice and a process related to the hold notice executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 will be described first.

As the process related to the hold notice, a confirmation process for the hold notice (step S305) and a hold command setting process (step S306) are set, and each of these processes is a part of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). The winning process (FIG. 10) for the operating port set as the process, more specifically, is executed as a part of the information acquisition process in step S204. That is, the confirmation process for the hold notice and the hold command setting process are executed based on the winning of the operating ports 33a and 33b. Hereinafter, the confirmation process for the hold notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Confirmation process for hold notice)
In the confirmation process for the hold notice, in step S1301, the start hold storage number N and the common hold number CRN stored in the hold number storage area FE of the hold ball storage area 232 are read, and the information on the hold number is transmitted to the MPU 202. Store in the register. After that, in steps S1302 to S1306, it is confirmed whether or not the pending information acquired by this winning is included in the information on winning the jackpot.

Specifically, first, in step S1302, among the pending information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning of the operating ports 33a and 33b, the information for jackpot determination, that is, the value of the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 is used. Grasp.

In the following step S1303, it is determined whether or not the mode is in the low probability mode. Specifically, by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204, it is determined whether or not the current winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode. In the case of the low probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1304, and the information for jackpot determination (value of the jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S1302 with reference to the hit / fail table for the low probability mode is the information corresponding to the jackpot winning. Identify if they are included in the group. Further, in the case of the high probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1305, and the jackpot determination information (big hit random number counter C1) grasped in step S302 is referred to with reference to the hit / fail table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 10A. (Value of) is included in the information set as a jackpot win.

After step S1304 or step S1305, the process proceeds to step S1306 to determine whether or not the jackpot determination information (value of the jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S1302 corresponds to the jackpot winning. If the jackpot winning is supported, the jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1307, and the confirmation process for this hold notice is terminated as it is.

In the process of step S1307, the information for determining the jackpot type among the pending information acquired in step S304 based on the current prize, that is, the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is grasped, and the distribution table is displayed. Refer to it to determine the type of jackpot. The information stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1307 includes information related to the type of jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1306, the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, out of the pending information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning of the operating ports 33a and 33b, the information for determining the out-of-reach, that is, the value of the acquired reach random number counter C3 is grasped.

In the following step S1309, the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the reach determination table storage area (reach determination information group storage means) 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to and grasped in step S1308. It is specified whether the information for reach determination (value of the reach random number counter C3) is included in the information set as the reach winning.

After executing the process of step S1309, the process proceeds to step S1310, and it is determined whether or not the reach determination information (value of the reach random number counter C3) grasped in step S1308 corresponds to the reach generation. When the reach generation is supported, in step S1311, the reach generation information is stored in the register of the MPU 202, and then the confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, this confirmation process is terminated as it is.

Here, since the main control device 81 determines whether or not the second type hold notice is possible, the notification / effect control device 82 and the display control device 212, which are the control devices on the sub side, relate to the hold notice. Processing such as approval / disapproval judgment is not executed. On the other hand, regarding the type 1 / type 3 hold notice, it is entrusted to the notification / effect control device 82 and the display control device 212, which are the control devices on the sub side, to decide whether or not to allow the hold notice. In this way, when executing a plurality of types of hold notices, the decision-making authority is assigned to each control device, thereby avoiding the concentration of control load due to the diversification of hold notices.

Here, as the setting mode of the fixed display time, the setting mode in which the fixed display time is set in the same manner as the fixed display time setting process shown in the first embodiment and the type 2 hold notice are met. A setting mode for determining the fixed display time is provided. Hereinafter, the setting process of the fixed display time in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 26.

(Confirmed display time setting process)
In the process of setting the fixed display time, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the game times correspond to the special setting of the fixed display time. Specifically, the determination in step S1401 is performed based on whether or not the special setting flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.

If a negative determination is made in step S1401, the process proceeds to step S1402. In step S1402, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the highly accurate gaming state. If a negative determination is made in step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403. In step S1403, it is determined whether or not there is a stored subsequent pending information corresponding to a jackpot or missed reach.

If a negative determination is made in step S1403 or an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, the normal setting process of the confirmed display time is executed in step S1404 to end the main setting process. Since the normal setting process shown in step S1404 is the same as the fixed display time setting process (see FIG. 18) shown in the first embodiment, the description is incorporated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1403, the process proceeds to step S1405. In step S1405, a special setting availability lottery process for the confirmed display time is executed. That is, whether or not the second type hold notice in the present embodiment can be executed is determined by lottery on the condition that the game is in a normal game state and the game times corresponding to the jackpot or the missed reach are reserved. Specifically, a lottery for whether or not to give notice of hold is performed with reference to the lottery table stored in ROM 203. Regarding the lottery table, the lottery table for jackpots that is referred to when the pending information that triggered it corresponds to the jackpot, and the lottery table that is referred to when the pending information that triggered it is out and corresponds to normal reach It is roughly divided into a lottery table for normal reach and a lottery table for super reach that is referred to when the pending information that triggered the event corresponds to super reach.

In addition, if there are multiple stored hold information corresponding to big hit or miss super reach, it is also possible to regulate the type 2 hold notice triggered by the new hold information. It is possible. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being directed to the variable display and the attention to the confirmed display from diminishing due to the intervention of the reach display during the hold notice. it can. Further, for example, when super reach is performed, it is necessary to evacuate the character used in the reach display as shown in the first embodiment. Therefore, by implementing the above regulation, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of inconvenience such as the time required for saving the character (time related to the end display) cannot be guaranteed.

If the lottery process in step S1405 is not won, the type 3 hold notice is not given, and the final display time is selected by the normal setting process in step S1404. On the other hand, if the lottery process of step S1405 is won, the process proceeds to step S1407 to perform the special setting pattern determination process. In the special setting pattern determination process, it is determined how to change the variable display time. In the present embodiment, the one corresponding to the second definite display time "0.8 sec" shorter than the reference first definite display time "1.0 sec" and the one corresponding to the first definite display time "1.0 sec" It is stored that it corresponds to the long third fixed display time "1.2 sec", and when the former is selected in the special setting pattern, the first special setting flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. , When the latter is selected, the second special setting flag is stored.

Regarding the above-mentioned second / third confirmed display time, the second confirmed display time "0.8 sec" is shorter than the standard first confirmed display time when the pending information that triggered the jackpot corresponds to the jackpot. Is easier to select than the third confirmed display time "1.2 sec", which is longer than the first confirmed display time, and is the reference when the pending information that triggered the release corresponds to the reach. The third fixed display time "1.2 sec", which is longer than the fixed display time, is easier to be selected than the second fixed display time "0.8 sec", which is shorter than the first fixed display time. As a result, the jackpot expectation when the fixed display time is shortened is higher than the jackpot expectation when the fixed display time is extended.

After the first special setting flag is stored, the second fixed display time "0.8 sec" is set as the fixed display time until the game round that triggered the hold notice is executed (hereinafter, in this embodiment). The hold notice is referred to as the second type notice effect A), and after that, the third fixed display time is set as the fixed display time until the game times that triggered the hold notice are executed by storing the second special setting flag. "1.2 sec" will be set (hereinafter, the hold notice in this embodiment will be referred to as a type 2 notice effect B). In addition, these special setting flags are configured to be deleted when the game times related to the hold information that triggered the hold notice are executed, and the confirmation display time is second fixed in the same game times. It is avoided that the display time is "0.8 sec" or the third confirmed display time is "1.2 sec".

After executing the process of step S1407, or when an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the process proceeds to step S1408. In step S1408, a special setting process for the final display time is performed. Specifically, the confirmation display time is set as to whether or not it is determined in step S1407.

Here, the flow of the second type advance notice production will be illustrated with reference to FIG. 27. 27 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the stored pending information, FIG. 27 (b1) is a timing chart when the second type notice effect A is executed, and FIG. 27 (b2) is the second type notice effect B. Is a timing chart when is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 27 (a1), all the hold information stored in the first area Ra1 to the third area Ra3 of the hold area RE corresponds to complete deviation. In this state, there is no hold information in the hold area RE that triggers the execution of the second type notice effects A and B.

As shown in FIG. 27 (a2), when new hold information is stored in the fourth hold area Ra4 and this hold information corresponds to a jackpot, it is a condition that the game state is the normal game state. A lottery will be held as to whether or not to give a Type 2 hold notice triggered by this hold information. If it is decided by this lottery that the second type hold notice will be given, the variable display time will be shortened from the next game round.

As shown in FIG. 27 (a3), when the game progresses and the hold information stored in the fourth hold area Ra4 moves to the third hold area Ra3, the second type hold notice is started. In this case, since the three hold information exists before the hold information that triggered the second type hold notice, the fixed display time is changed over the three game times.

For example, when the second type advance notice effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 27 (b1), the final display time in each game time is changed from "1.0 sec" to "1.0 sec" with the start of the second type advance notice effect A. It will be shortened to "0.8 sec". As a result, the game progress is temporarily accelerated toward the corresponding game times. Such acceleration can favorably fuel the expectations of the player.

On the other hand, when the second type notice effect B is executed, as shown in FIG. 27 (b2), the final display time in each game time is "1.0 sec" with the start of the second type notice effect B. Is extended to "1.2 sec". As a result, the game progress is temporarily delayed toward the corresponding game times. Unnecessarily delaying the game can be a factor that reduces the motivation to play, but such a meaningful delay can suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience. In addition, by delaying the progress of the game in the normal game state, it is possible to suppress the unreasonable increase in gambling.

In particular, if the Type 2 notice effect A for the purpose of acceleration and the Type 2 advance notice effect B for the purpose of delay are used in combination, when viewed over a long period of time while causing a slow / fast difference in the flow of the game. It is suppressed that the progress of the game becomes unreasonably fast or slow.

According to the second embodiment described in detail above, the definite display time goes beyond the function as a mere interval and exerts a function of suggesting the progress of the game later. When comparing the case where the variable display is performed and the case where the definite display is performed, the player's attention tends to be directed exclusively to the former, and when the latter is executed, the player's attention is It is expected that it will be directed to subsequent game times. In this regard, according to the above configuration, the confirmation display suggests information on the game times to be executed after that, and the player's attention to the confirmation display can be suitably improved.

In particular, since the above suggestion is made due to the difference in the finalized display time, it is possible to attract the attention of the player from the start of the finalized display to the end of the finalized display. In the present embodiment, the difference between the definite display time when the type 2 hold notice is given and the definite display time when the second type hold notice is not given is suppressed to about 20%. In other words, although some discomfort may occur, it is difficult to be sure of a clear difference by referring to one game. Here, since the hold notice is configured so that it can be continued over a plurality of game times, it is assumed that the player who feels a sense of discomfort as described above pays more attention to the subsequent game times. To. That is, it is easy to direct the player's attention to the definite display by not providing a large difference (for example, a difference of 50% or more) that can be clearly felt.

Further, by incorporating such a mere difference in display time as an effect, it is possible to diversify the hold notice effect and preferably suppress an increase in the control load or the like due to the diversification. In particular, since the difference between the type 2 advance notice effect A and the type 2 advance notice effect B is caused by the length of the time, it is also suitable for increasing the control load due to the diversification of the type 2 advance notice effect itself. Can be suppressed.

<Third embodiment>
In the second embodiment described above, the type 2 notice effect A and the type 2 notice effect B are performed according to the change in the fixed display time. In the present embodiment, when the type 2 notice effect (specifically, the type 2 notice effect B) is performed, the display effect corresponding to the type 2 notice effect is performed using the fixed display time on the display screen 41a or the like. One of the features is to do it. In particular, since the fixed display time is extended for the second type notice effect B, it is possible to suitably secure the time for executing the display effect by using this extended portion. it can. Hereinafter, the second type notice effect B in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28A is a timing chart showing the flow of the type 2 notice effect, and FIG. 28B is a schematic view showing the display effect executed on the display screen 41a when the type 2 notice effect is performed. ..

In the game round in which the second type advance notice effect B is executed, the variable display of the symbol is started at the timing of tk1 when the previous game round is completed (see FIG. 28 (b1)). The variation display ends at the timing of tk2 when a predetermined variation display time (for example, 3 sec) has elapsed from the timing of tk1, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the deviation result is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 28 (b2)).

From this, the variable display is changed to the confirmed display. When the second type advance notice effect B is selected, the third final display time "1.2 sec" is set as the final display time. As a result, after the timing of tc2, the confirmed display is continued until the third confirmed display time elapses, and the start of the next game round is restricted.

Bubbles from the lower end of the display screen 41a at the timing of tk3, which is a predetermined time from the timing of tk2, and in the present embodiment, the same length as the second confirmed display time "0.8 sec" (shortest confirmed display time) has elapsed. The production image (bubble image) imitating the above starts to rise. This effect image is displayed on the front side of the design, and the design is hidden behind the bubble image.

More specifically, the amount of the bubble image that started to rise at the timing of tc3 is a predetermined time from the timing of tc2, and in the present embodiment, the same length as the first definite display time "1.0 sec" (reference). The maximum is reached at the timing of tc4 when the fixed display time) has elapsed, and at this timing, it becomes impossible to visually confirm the combination of the symbols that have already been stopped and displayed (see FIG. 28 (b3)).

In this state where the combination of symbols cannot be visually recognized, the amount of bubble images newly appearing from the lower end is smaller than the amount of bubble images disappearing to the upper end of the display screen 41a and is displayed on the display screen 41a. It is continued until the timing of tc5 when the created bubble image starts to decrease. After the timing of tk5, the new bubble image does not appear, so that the displayed bubble image disappears to the upper end of the display screen 41a. At the tk6 timing when the third final display time "1.2 sec" has elapsed from the timing of tk2, the bubble image disappears completely and the state before the display effect is started is restored (see FIG. 28 (b4)). ). Along with this, the variable display of the symbol related to the next game round is started (see FIG. 28 (b5)).

In this way, the player pays attention to whether or not the display effect is performed until the final display is completed by performing the display effect using the extended portion (the latter half portion in the final display time) in the final display time. Can be encouraged to face.

When the display effect is performed in the extended portion, the function of notifying the result of the game round by the confirmed display will be fully exhibited. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a display effect using the entire display screen 41a (variable display area ME), and the impact of the display effect can be enhanced, resulting in a definite display. It is possible to prevent the notification function given to the time from not being properly exerted.

If the design becomes invisible during the variable display (for example, reach display), it may be a factor to confuse the player, but the design becomes invisible due to the display effect performed after the game result has already been announced. However, such inconvenience does not occur. Therefore, the restrictions on the production can be reduced as compared with the case of the variable display, and the production with a strong impact becomes possible.

Even when the degree of extension of the final display time is suppressed, it is possible to easily grasp the type 2 advance notice effect by causing such a visual change.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the fixed display time is set (changed) according to the game state, but in the present embodiment, when shifting to the open / close execution mode (corresponding to the "special game state"). The configuration differs from that of the first embodiment in that the final display time is set (changed) according to the type of the opening / closing execution mode (result of the jackpot lottery or the distribution lottery). The type of opening / closing execution mode, which is a prerequisite in the first place, is also different from that of the first embodiment. Therefore, first, the types of the opening / closing execution mode in the present embodiment and the outline thereof will be described, and then the characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

Also in the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not to shift to the open / close execution mode by referring to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The value of the random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot is stored as a hit / miss table (hit / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area 221 as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the pass / fail table in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 30, as the pass / fail tables, the pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) in FIG. 30 (a) and the pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high) in FIG. 30 (b). Probability pass / fail information group) is set.

Under the gaming state (game state corresponding to the low probability mode) in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery, as shown in FIG. 30A, the value of the random number that wins the jackpot (that is, , Winning information) are three, "7", "307", and "507". That is, among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "307", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results, and the actual jackpot probability by one lottery is 1/200. It has become. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, as shown in FIG. 30B, the value of the random number that wins the jackpot (that is, the winning information) is "5. , "7", "36" ... "572", "598", 30 pieces. That is, among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "5", "7", "36" ... "572", "598" correspond to the jackpot results, and one lottery is performed. The actual jackpot probability is 1/20. If the winning probability of the high probability mode is higher than that of the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

In any of the lottery modes, the result will be out of order except for the value of the random number that wins the jackpot. Has been done. In the first embodiment described above, it is stipulated that the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode only when a big hit result is obtained, but in the present embodiment, opening / closing execution is executed even for a part of the deviation result (special deviation result). It is configured to shift to the mode. Details of the difference between the special deviation result and the normal deviation result will be described later.

Similar to the first embodiment, the jackpot type counter C2 is also configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 49, reach the maximum value (that is, 49), and then return to 0. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plurality of jackpot results are (1) an mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) a lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) electric power after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Differences are set in three conditions of the support mode in the accessory 34. As a result, five big hits are set. Hereinafter, each of the above conditions will be described.

The mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode is high so that the frequency of winning the variable winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high or low. Frequent winning mode and low frequency winning mode are set.

Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened and closed a plurality of times, and one opening is performed until 30 sec (high frequency time) elapses or to the large winning opening 32a. It will continue until the number of winning prizes reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened and closed a plurality of times, and one opening is performed until 0.1 sec (low frequency time) elapses or to the large winning opening 32a. It will continue until the number of winnings reaches 10.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the launch handle 54 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 53 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec. .. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one large winning opening 32a is 0.1 ec as described above. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of one large winning opening is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode in which the low-frequency winning mode is applied, winning of a game ball is substantially less likely to occur.

Therefore, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening of the variable winning device 32 is completed based on the establishment of the time-related condition, and the substantial variation in the opening time is suppressed. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing execution mode progresses in a fixed cycle, and the required time is also uniform. On the other hand, in the high frequency winning mode, the opening of the variable winning device 32 is completed based on the establishment of the condition relating to time or the condition relating to the number of winning balls. The presence or absence and timing of ball entry depends on various factors. For this reason, the opening time varies substantially (becomes large). In the present embodiment, the opening time in the low-frequency winning mode depends on the condition related to the time, and the stop display time of the symbol combination described later is utilized by utilizing the fact that the time variation does not substantially occur. The details of this configuration will be described later.

In the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time limit (or opening restriction period) for one opening of the large winning opening is the large winning opening 32a in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. As long as the frequency of winning a prize is high, the value is not limited to the above value and is arbitrary. However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the variable winning device 32 should not be substantially won during the low-frequency winning mode. Is preferable. By the way, the number of times of opening in each winning mode may be changed arbitrarily. For example, it is possible to set the number of times the large winning opening is opened once or three times or more in the low frequency winning mode.

Regarding the distribution destination of the game result to the jackpot type counter C2 (that is, the lottery result by the winning / losing lottery and the distribution lottery), as in the first embodiment, the distribution as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203. It is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the table storage area 222. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 31, as the distribution table, the distribution table (first distribution information group) for the first ball entry unit 33d in FIG. 31 (a) and the second ball entry table in FIG. 31 (b). A distribution table (second distribution information group) for unit 33e is set.

In the distribution table for the first ball entry section, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result (high probability corresponding game result) and the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result (explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result) are used as the distribution destinations of the game results. High probability correspondence game result), 16R normal jackpot result (low probability correspondence game result), 16R probability variation jackpot result A (high probability correspondence game result), 16R probability variation jackpot result B (high probability correspondence game result) are set.

The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode corresponding to the low frequency winning mode is executed, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. Yes, these high-probability modes and high-frequency support modes will continue until the next jackpot result. The explicit 2R probability change jackpot result is a jackpot result corresponding to the so-called sudden probability change (sudden probability). Looking at the operation mode of the electric accessory 34, it becomes clear that the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result was obtained. Therefore, when the result of the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot is obtained, that fact will be clearly indicated before shifting to the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode.

The unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode corresponding to the low frequency winning mode is executed, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode. This high-probability mode will continue until the next big hit result. At this time, since the operation mode of the electric accessory 34 does not change (the low frequency support mode remains), it is subsequently grasped from the operation mode of the electric accessory 34 that the result is an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot. That is impossible. The unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result corresponding to the so-called latent probability variation (latent probability).

The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result described above are jackpot results in which the payout of the game ball cannot be expected. On the other hand, the various 16R jackpot results shown below are jackpot results that can be expected to pay out game balls.

The 16R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode corresponding to the high frequency winning mode is executed, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. .. This high-frequency support mode is continued until the number of game times executed during the mode reaches 100 times.

In the 16R probability variation jackpot result A, the open / close execution mode corresponding to the low frequency winning mode → the high frequency winning mode is executed, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / losing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. It is a big hit result. These high-probability modes and high-frequency support modes will continue until the next big hit result. In the 16R probability variation jackpot result A, the low frequency winning mode is supported from the first round to the second round, and the high frequency winning mode is supported from the third round to the 16th round. In other words, while the payout of game balls cannot be expected from the first round to the second round, the actual payout of game balls can be expected from the third round onward, which is substantially equivalent to the 14R probability variation jackpot result. However, it is a so-called jump-up bonus.

The 16R probability variation jackpot result B is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode corresponding to the high frequency winning mode is executed, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. is there. These high-probability modes and high-frequency support modes will continue until the next big hit result.

In the distribution table for the first ball entry section, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 49", "0 to 9" corresponds to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and "10 to 19" is not. Explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result corresponds to, "20-29" corresponds to 16R normal jackpot result, "30-39" corresponds to 16R probability variation jackpot result A, "40-49" corresponds to It corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot result B.

On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second ball entry section, as shown in FIG. 31 (b), the 16R normal jackpot result (low probability corresponding game result) and the 16R probability variation jackpot result A (as the distribution destination of the game result) High probability corresponding game result) and 16R probability variation jackpot result B (high probability corresponding game result) are set. In the present embodiment, the probability of entering the high-frequency winning mode when a big hit is won based on the winning of the second winning section 33e is a big hit winning based on the winning of the first winning section 33d. In that case, the probability of entering the high-frequency winning mode is set high. More specifically, in the distribution lottery based on the entry into the second ball entry unit 33e, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result are excluded from the target, and all the distribution results. Is limited so that the payout of the game ball is substantially generated. As a result, the superiority of the second ball entry section 33e over the first ball entry section 33d is guaranteed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, when the result is a loss in the winning / losing lottery as described above, the result is a normal loss result or a special loss result. The open / close execution mode does not shift to the normal deviation result that occurs with a relatively high probability when the deviation result occurs. On the other hand, in the case of a special deviation result that occurs with a relatively low probability, a special deviation state occurs. In the special out-of-order state, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode in the situation where the result is out of the winning / losing lottery. However, the open / close execution mode of the migration destination corresponds to the low frequency winning mode. Therefore, even if the result is a special deviation, it cannot be expected that the game ball will win the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening 32a). In addition, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the transition between the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode does not occur.

Although the details will be described later, the operation mode of the variable winning device 32 in the open / close execution mode shifted by the special deviation result and the operation mode of the variable winning device 32 in the open / close execution mode shifted by the 2R probability variation jackpot result are It is common. Due to the existence of such a special deviation result, it is possible to use the opening of the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 as an effect.

Here, when a special deviation result is obtained, only the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the low-frequency winning mode is entered, and then the game state before shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is restored. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned unspecified 2R probability change jackpot result occurs, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode which is the low frequency winning mode, and after that, the support mode is the low frequency support mode, but the winning / losing lottery mode is It becomes a high probability mode. Then, the occurrence of the special deviation result and the occurrence of the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result are common in that the opening / closing execution mode is shifted to the same low-frequency winning mode and the support mode becomes the low-frequency support thereafter. The difference is that in the former, the winning / failing lottery mode takes over the previous mode (for example, it remains in the low probability mode, and in the case of the high probability mode, the high probability mode is maintained), whereas in the latter it becomes the high probability mode. (For example, in the case of the low probability mode, it is upgraded to the high probability mode, and in the case of the high probability mode, the high probability mode is maintained). That is, the occurrence of the special deviation result and the occurrence of the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result have the same behavior of each moving object such as the behavior of the variable winning device 32 and the behavior of the electric accessory 34, and only the internal lottery state is different. It will be. As a result, an open / close execution mode, which is a low-frequency winning mode, occurs under the normal gaming state, and if it catches the player's eyes, for example, whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode after that. It becomes possible to imagine, and it becomes possible to raise the degree of attention to the game.

Further, when the above-mentioned explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, which is a low-frequency winning mode, and then the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode and the winning / losing lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode. Then, the occurrence of the special off result and the occurrence of the explicit 2R probability change jackpot result are common by shifting to the open / close execution mode as the same low frequency winning mode, and the difference between the two is that the winning / failing lottery mode is the first mode in the former. In contrast to taking over (for example, it remains in low probability mode), in the latter it becomes high probability mode (for example, in the case of low probability mode, it is upgraded to high probability mode, and in the case of high probability mode, the high probability mode is maintained. The difference is that the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. That is, when a special deviation result occurs and an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the behavior of the variable winning device 32 is the same, but after returning to the normal gaming state by the end of the open / close execution mode, the electric accessory The behavior of 34 and the internal lottery state will be different.

In this way, the open / close execution mode corresponding to the low-frequency winning mode related to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, and the special loss result becomes a crossroads (branch point), and the game state can change variously. Become.

In addition, it is also possible to change to a special deviation result (so-called small hit) that does not affect the normal gaming state, or to provide a predetermined jackpot result (for example, 2R normal jackpot result) that affects the normal gaming state in addition to the special deviation result. It is possible. By setting the predetermined jackpot result as the jackpot result corresponding to the low frequency winning mode and shifting to the low probability mode after the predetermined jackpot result is obtained, it is possible to give a further accent to the change in the gaming state. Incidentally, after a predetermined jackpot result is obtained, the configuration may be a low-frequency support mode or a high-frequency support mode with a limited number of times.

A type in which multiple types of open / close execution modes (low-frequency winning mode and high-frequency winning mode) with different advantages are set as "special game states", and the game state is changed from the state before the opening / closing execution mode via the low-frequency winning mode. As described above, in the game machine of the above, the expectation of winning the ball into the variable winning device 32 in the low frequency winning mode is lower than that in the high frequency winning mode. Therefore, for example, when the movement of the variable winning device 32 in the low-frequency winning mode is noticed by the player, there is a concern that the player is likely to feel a loss. In this respect, one of the features of the present embodiment is that the occurrence of such inconvenience is suppressed and a device is made to suitably diversify the transition opportunity of the gaming state. Hereinafter, the configuration that is the premise of the device will be described.

First, the fluctuation start processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32. Since the main flow of the fluctuation start processing in the present embodiment is the same as the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 15) shown in the first embodiment, the description of these common parts is simplified. , I will explain mainly the differences.

(Fluctuation start processing)
In the fluctuation start processing, first, in step S1601, the hit / fail determination processing is executed based on the hold information referred to in the fluctuation start processing this time. Specifically, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for jackpot determination, that is, the information acquired from the jackpot random number counter C1 and the low probability mode / high probability stored in the hit / miss table storage area 221 of the ROM 203. With reference to the winning / failing table for the mode, it is specified whether or not the above information is included in the information group corresponding to the jackpot winning or the information group corresponding to the special loss.

In the following step S1602, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination process in step S1601 is the result corresponding to the jackpot (winning result: jackpot result). If it is a big hit result, the type determination process is executed in step S1603.

In the type determination process, the information for type determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 222 of the ROM 203 are referred to. And the type is judged.

In the following step S1604, it is determined whether or not the current result is a probability variation jackpot result based on the information specified in the type determination process in step S1603. If it is a probability variation jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot result is performed in step S1605.

Here, the stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot result will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33. In the stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot result, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the result of the type determination process in step S1603 is the 16R probability variation jackpot result. If a negative determination is made in step S1701, the process proceeds to step S1702.

In step S1702, it is determined whether or not the result of the type determination process is an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, the process proceeds to step S1703. In step S1703, the stop result setting process for the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the information of the mode of the pattern (the mode of the pattern corresponding to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result) to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 is stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 203. It is specified by referring to the table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 204. After executing the process of step S1703, the explicit 2R probability variation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 as information for specifying in the MPU 202 that the game result this time is the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result. , Ends the stop result setting process for this probability change jackpot result.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1702, that is, if the result of the type determination process is an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1705, the stop result setting process for the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the information of the pattern mode (the mode of the pattern corresponding to the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result) to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 is stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 203. It is specified by referring to the result table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 204. After executing the process of step S1705, the unspecified 2R probabilistic flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 as information for specifying in the MPU 202 that the current game result is the unspecified 2R probable jackpot result. Then, the stop result setting process for this probability variation jackpot result is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S1701, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, that is, if the result of the type determination process in step S1603 is a 16R probability variation jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S1707. In step S1707, it is determined whether or not the result of the type determination process is the 16R probability variation jackpot result A. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1707, the process proceeds to step S1708.

In step S1708, the stop result setting process for the 16R probability variation jackpot result A is executed. Specifically, the information of the pattern mode (the mode of the pattern corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result A) to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 is stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 203. It is specified by referring to the table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 204. After executing the process of step S1708, the 16R probability variation flag A is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 as information for specifying in the MPU 202 that the game result this time is the 16R probability variation jackpot result A. , Ends the stop result setting process for this probability change jackpot result.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1707, that is, if the result of the type determination process is the 16R probability variation jackpot result B, the process proceeds to step S1710. In step S1710, the stop result setting process for the 16R probability variation jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the information of the pattern mode (the mode of the pattern corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result B) to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 is stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 203. It is specified by referring to the table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 204. After executing the process of step S1710, the 16R probability variation flag B is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 as information for specifying in the MPU 202 that the game result this time is the 16R probability variation jackpot result B. , Ends the stop result setting process for this probability change jackpot result.

Returning to the description of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 32) again, if a negative determination is made in step S1604, that is, if the result of the type determination process in step S1603 is not the probability variation jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S1606. In step S1606, the stop result setting process for the 16R normal jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the stop result table in which the information of the mode of the pattern (the mode of the pattern corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot result) to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 is stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 203. Is specified, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 204. After executing the process of step S1710, the 16R normal flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 as information for specifying in the MPU 202 that the game result this time is the 16R normal jackpot result.

Returning to the description of step S1602, if a negative determination is made in step S1602, that is, if a jackpot is not won in the winning / failing determination process, the process proceeds to step S1608. As described above, in the present embodiment, the deviation result is provided with a normal deviation result and a special deviation result, and processing is executed according to each deviation result.

First, in step S1608, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination process in step S1601 is a special deviation result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1608, the process proceeds to step S1609. In step S1609, the stop result setting process for the special deviation result is executed. Specifically, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 203 for information on the mode of the pattern (the mode of the pattern corresponding to the special deviation result) to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43. It is specified by reference, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 204. After executing the process of step S1710, the special flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 as information for the MPU 202 to identify that the game result this time is the special flag.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1608, that is, if the result of the pass / fail determination process in step S1601 is a normal deviation result, the process proceeds to step S1610. In step S1610, the stop result setting process for the normal deviation result is executed. Specifically, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 203 is used to store information on the mode of the pattern (the mode of the pattern corresponding to the normal deviation result) that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43. It is specified by reference, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 204.

After executing any of the processes of steps S1605, S1607, S1601, and S1611, the variable display time setting process for displaying the variable pattern of the pattern is executed in step S1612. In the following step S1613, the setting process of the confirmation display time for performing the confirmation display after the fluctuation display is executed based on various information such as the fluctuation display time (for example, the presence / absence of the reach display and the presence / absence of the jackpot).

After executing the variable display time and the fixed display time setting process in step S1612 and step S1613, the variable display command and the type command are set in step S1614. The fluctuation command includes information on whether or not reach has occurred, information on the fluctuation display time, and information on the confirmed display time. In addition, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command corresponds to the information corresponding to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the information corresponding to the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, the information corresponding to the 16 normal jackpot result, and the information corresponding to the 16 probability variation jackpot result A as the game result information. The information to be used, the information corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result B, the information corresponding to the special deviation result, and the information corresponding to the normal deviation result are included.

The variation command and the type command set in step S1614 are transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). In the notification / effect control device 82, based on the received variation command and type command, the outline of the variation display pattern (display effect) in the symbol display device 41 in the game time in the game time, and the display lamp unit 63. The light emission pattern and the sound output pattern from the speaker unit 64 are determined, and the display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled so that the determined content of the effect is executed. Further, the notification / effect control device 82 adds an outline of the variation display pattern determined by the notification / effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form of the variation command and the type command. Send. The display control device 212 grasps the fluctuation display pattern in the symbol display device 41 in the game round based on the received variation command and type command, and the symbol display device so as to execute the grasped variation display pattern. Display control of 41. After that, in step S1615, the variation display of the pattern is started on the operation port display unit of the main display unit 43, and then the variation start processing is ended.

Here, a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41 when various jackpot results are obtained by the winning / failing lottery and the sorting lottery will be supplementarily described.

As described above, on the display screen 41a, three symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of upper, middle, and lower are set, and the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are 9 of "1" to "9". It has a main symbol of each type and a sub symbol arranged between each of the main symbols, and the middle symbol row Z2 is between the 10 main symbols of "0" to "9" and each of the main symbols. It has an arranged sub-design.

In the pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and the combination of the same specific symbols is the effective line (see FIG. 7). By displaying the stop on one of the lines, it is taught that the 16R probability variation jackpot result B has been obtained.

In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and the same combination of non-specific symbols is one of the above valid lines (see FIG. 11). By displaying the stop on the top, it is taught that either the 16R probability variation jackpot result B or the 16R normal jackpot result has been obtained.

That is, when the combination of specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the display screen 41a, it is clearly indicated that the result is a probabilistic jackpot, while when the combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed, the probabilistic jackpot is displayed. It is unclear whether the result is the result or the normal jackpot result.

16 Probability variation jackpot result A, 2R Probability variation jackpot result and special deviation result, both symbols are waiting in a state where the combination of the same symbols is stopped by the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3. The "CHANGE" symbol (special symbol: almighty symbol) that can be replaced with the main symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed on the same line as the effective line (on the reach line described later). That is, when the symbol combination including the "CHANGE" symbol is stopped and displayed, it is clearly indicated that the result is 16R probability variation jackpot result A, explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, unspecified 2R jackpot result, or special deviation result. On the other hand, it is unclear which result is obtained at least when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed.

In the operating port display unit of the main display unit 43 described above, the result of the winning / failing lottery and the result of the distribution lottery are clearly indicated. However, although the above-mentioned results are also displayed separately in the operation port display unit, the plurality of LEDs constituting the operation port display unit are individually lit / in each operation port display unit. By turning off the lights and changing the color development pattern in various ways, the patterns corresponding to each result are diversified. Then, similar ones are set for the pattern corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result A, the pattern corresponding to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the pattern corresponding to the unspecified 2R jackpot result, and the pattern corresponding to the special deviation result. Even if the display unit for the operating port is visually confirmed, it is difficult to identify the type during the period when the definite display is performed.

In the corresponding game time that triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode, it is difficult to identify the game result in the corresponding game time by referring to either the symbol display device 41 or the main display unit 43. It is possible to encourage the player to imagine the flow of the game after the game is played, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

By the way, depending on the player's taste and the like, there may be a need to grasp the game result at an early stage. In consideration of such needs, at least for the pattern that is stopped and displayed on the display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 43, 16R probability variation jackpot result A, explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, unspecified 2R jackpot result, The difference in the pattern may be clarified so that it can be easily identified which is the special deviation result. That is, the main display unit 43 may be configured to display the game result in a state where the distinctiveness is enhanced so that the player can easily grasp it.

Next, the game state transition process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 34 to 37.

(Game state transition process)
As shown in FIG. 34, in the game state transition process, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S1802, and the main display unit 43 (display unit for the operating port) determines whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern is completed. If it is not the timing when the variation display is finished, the game state transition process is finished as it is.

If the variable display has ended, more specifically, if the preset stop display period (interval period: fixed display period) has elapsed since the variable display ended, the process proceeds to step S1803. It is determined whether or not the game result of the current game times (the result of the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery) corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, whether any of the 16 probability variation flag A, the 16R probability variation flag B, the 16R normal flag, the explicit 2R probability variation flag, the unspecified 2R probability variation flag, and the special deviation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. Determine if not. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

If any of the above flags is stored, the start processing of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S1804. By the start processing, the operation restriction of the variable winning device 32 by the lock device is released, and the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 32 is allowed until the opening / closing execution mode ends.

In step S1805, it is determined whether or not the stored jackpot result correspondence flag is for 16R. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1805, "16" is set in the open number counter OC provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S1806. If a negative determination is made in step S1805, "2" is set in the open number counter OC provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S1807.

After executing the processes of steps S1806 and S1807, it is determined in step S1808 whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the high-frequency winning mode. That is, it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the above-mentioned 16R probability variation jackpot result B or 16R normal jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1808, the process proceeds to step S1809. In step S1809, the high-frequency winning mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.

In the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot result A, the low frequency winning mode is upgraded to the high frequency winning mode in the middle of the opening / closing execution mode. However, since the mode shifts to the high frequency winning mode via the low frequency winning mode, the high frequency winning mode flag is not set at this point.

After executing the process of step S1809, or when a negative determination is made in step S1808, the process proceeds to step S1810 to execute the opening command setting process. This set opening command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12).

The notification / effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. Information indicating what kind of effect is to be performed corresponding to the open / close execution mode is added to the opening command. The content of this effect includes the display mode in the symbol display device 41, and the determined display mode is transmitted from the notification / effect control device 82 to the display control device 212. In the display control device 212, based on the opening command received from the main control device 81 via the notification / effect control device 82, the display corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode this time, for example, a moving image such as a character as the display content corresponding to the jackpot. The display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed so that the display, the background image, and the like are switched. After executing the process of step S1810, the external signal setting process is executed in step S1812 to end the game state transition process.

Here, the opening command setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35.

(Opening command setting process)
In the opening command setting process, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode of this time corresponds to either the 16R probability variation jackpot result B or the 16R normal jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, the process proceeds to step S1902, and the first type opening command is set. In the symbol display device 41, the first-class display effect is executed based on the reception of the first-class opening command. In the first type display effect, a message prompting the launch of the game ball toward the variable winning device 32, a moving image indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is started, and the like are displayed on the display screen 41a.

If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the process proceeds to step S1903, and it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode this time corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot result A. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S1903, the process proceeds to step S1904, and the second type opening command is set. In the symbol display device 41, the second type display effect is executed based on the reception of the second type opening command.

If a negative determination is made in step S1903, the process proceeds to step S1905. In step S1905, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S1905, the process proceeds to step S1906, and a third-class opening command is set. In the symbol display device 41, the third type display effect is executed based on the reception of the third type opening command.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1905, that is, if the opening / closing execution mode this time corresponds to either an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special deviation result, a type 4 opening command is set in step S1907. To do. In the symbol display device 41, the type 4 display effect is executed based on the reception of the type 4 opening command.

Regarding the type 2 display effect to the type 4 display effect, the effect modes from the opening display to the middle of the ending display are common, and the details will be described later.

Returning to the description of step S1801, if it is determined in step S1801 that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1812. In step S1812, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the large winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S1813. Here, the large winning opening opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Opening and closing of the winning opening)
In the large winning opening opening / closing process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening 32a) is open. Specifically, such a determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning drive unit 32c of the variable winning device 32. If the large winning opening 32a is not open, it is determined in step S2002 whether or not the value of the open number counter OC is "0". If an affirmative judgment is made in step S2002, the opening / closing process of the main prize opening is terminated as it is.

If a negative determination is made in step S2002, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the value of the open timer counter TC is "0". The open timer counter TC is a counter that is referred to when grasping the open period or interval period of the large winning opening 32a, and the value is subtracted by "1" each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 9) is executed. Will be done. If a negative determination is made in step S2003, the opening / closing process of the winning opening is terminated.

If the value of the open number counter OC is not "0" and the value of the open timer counter TC is "0", the process proceeds to step S2004 to execute the opening process of the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening 32a). .. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 32c is set to the driving state in order to open the large winning opening 32a. After that, the processes of steps S2005 to S2007 and steps S2008 are executed as the closing condition setting process (opening setting process) corresponding to the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening 32a).

In step S2005, it is determined whether or not the high frequency winning mode is supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2005, the process proceeds to step S2006, the open timer counter TC is set to "15000" (corresponding to 30 sec), and the winning counter PC is set to "10" in the following step S2008. If a negative determination is made in step S2005, "50" (corresponding to 0.1 sec) is set in the open timer counter TC, and "10" is set in the winning counter PC in subsequent step S2008.

After executing the process of step S2008, an open command indicating that the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening 32a) has been opened is set in step S2009, and the opening / closing process of the large winning opening is completed. This set release command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (see FIG. 12). On the premise that the notification / effect control device 82 is in the high-frequency winning mode, the content of the effect corresponding to the release is determined based on the received release command, and the content of the determined effect is executed. Control various devices so as to. In addition, in the low frequency winning mode, the content of the effect does not change by the release command. That is, changes in the mode of display effect based on the release command are regulated.

Returning to the description of step S2001, if it is determined in step S2001 that the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening 32a) is open, the process proceeds to step S2010, and whether or not the value of the open timer counter TC is "0". Is determined. If the value of the open timer counter TC is not "0", the process proceeds to step S2011, and whether or not the game ball has won the large winning opening 32a is based on the detection signal from the detection sensor provided in the variable winning device 32. To judge. If no prize has been won, the opening / closing process of the main prize opening is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when a prize has been won, the output process of the prize command is executed in step S2012. The winning command is output to the notification / effect control device 82, and is in the open / close execution mode executed by the winning command, for example, on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41 on the premise that the high frequency winning mode is set. The composition is such that the production changes. In addition, when the low frequency winning mode is set, the content of the effect does not change depending on the winning command. That is, changes in the mode of display effect based on the winning command are regulated.

After executing the command output process in step S2012, the process proceeds to step S2013. In step S2013, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1, and in the following step S2014, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0". If it is not "0", the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is performed as it is. finish.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S2014, that is, when the value of the winning counter PC is "0", or when a positive judgment is made in step S2010 (that is, it is determined that the value of the open timer counter TC is "0". If), it means that the conditions for closing the large winning opening have been met. In this case, in step S2015, the variable winning drive unit 32c is put into a non-driving state in order to close the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening 32a).

In the following step S2016, the update process of the open number counter OC is executed. Specifically, when the value of the open number counter OC is not "0", the open number counter OC is decremented by 1, and when the value of the open number counter OC is "0", the open number counter OC is performed. Keep the value of "0".

After that, in step S2017, it is determined whether or not it is time to shift to the high-frequency winning mode by referring to the updated value of the open number counter OC and the type such as the jackpot that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. .. In the present embodiment, when the 16 probability variation jackpot result A is obtained, the mode shifts from the low frequency winning mode to the high frequency winning mode in the middle of the opening / closing execution mode (when the specified round is reached). Specifically, with the end of the second round, the mode shifts from the low frequency winning mode to the high frequency winning mode. Therefore, in the process of step S2017, it is determined whether or not the value of the open number counter OC is "14". Then, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2017, the high-frequency winning mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 in step S2018. If the trigger of the opening / closing execution mode is other than the 16R probability variation jackpot result A, a negative determination is made in step S2017.

After executing the process of step S2018, or when a positive determination is made in step S2017, the process proceeds to step S2019. In step S2019, it is determined whether or not the value of the open number counter OC is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S2019, the process proceeds to step S2020 to determine whether or not the high-frequency winning mode is in progress.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S2020, that is, in the high frequency winning mode, "1000" (corresponding to 2.0 sec) is set in the open timer counter TC. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2020, that is, in the low frequency winning mode, "300" (corresponding to 0.6 sec) is set in the open timer counter TC.

After executing the process of step S2021 or step S2022, the closing command is set in step S2023, and the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed. This set closing command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The notification / effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the closing command based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

Returning to the description of step S2019, if it is determined in step S2019 that the value of the open number counter OC is "0", the process proceeds to step S2020. In step S2024, the ending process is executed. In the start process, an ending waiting time for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the open / close execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204.

After that, in step S2025, after setting the ending command, the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (FIG. 34), after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S1813, it is determined in step S1814 whether or not the value of the open number counter OC is “0”, and step S1815. Determines whether or not the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the open number counter OC is not "0" or the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the value of the open number counter OC is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, in step S1816, after executing the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, this game End the state transition process.

As described above, one of the features of the present embodiment is that there is a difference in the advantage of the gaming state that shifts through the open / close execution mode, and the game mode can be diversified depending on the configuration related to the feature. It is planned. Hereinafter, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37, the configuration related to the embodiment, specifically, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode (step S1816) will be described.

(Transition processing at the end of open / close execution mode)
In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the game times that triggered the open / close execution mode correspond to the 16R probability variation jackpot result or the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability change flag A, the 16R probability change flag B, and the explicit 2R probability change flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102, and the flag related to the transition of the gaming state is deleted. Specifically, the jackpot result correspondence flags (16R probability variation flag A, 16R probability variation flag B, explicit 2R probability variation flag) stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 are erased, and the high probability mode flag and the high frequency winning mode are used. If flags, high-frequency support mode flags, etc. are stored, delete each of these flags.

After executing the erasing process of step S2102, the process proceeds to steps S2103 and S2104 to execute the game state setting process. Specifically, first, in step S2103, the high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. Based on the high-probability mode flag set in this way, the winning / losing table for the high-probability mode will be referred to in the winning / losing lottery in the subsequent game rounds.

After that, the process proceeds to step S2304, and the high-frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. Based on the high-frequency support mode flag set in this way, in the subsequent electric service support processing, the pass / fail table for the high-frequency support mode is referred to in the support lottery, and the variable display time of the pattern at the time of the support lottery is displayed. It is shortened (specifically set to 2.0 sec), and the period of opening is extended by one opening (specifically set to 5.0 sec).

After the game state setting process is performed in step S2103 and step S2104, the transition process at the end of the main open / close execution mode is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if the game times that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time are neither the 16R probability variation jackpot result nor the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S2105. In step S2105, it is determined whether or not the game times that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time correspond to the 16R normal jackpot result. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 16R normal flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2105, the process proceeds to step S2106, and the flag related to the transition of the gaming state is deleted. Specifically, the jackpot result correspondence flag (16R normal flag) stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 is erased, and the high probability mode flag, the high frequency winning mode flag, the high frequency support mode flag, etc. are stored. If so, clear each of those flags.

After executing the erasing process in step S806, the process proceeds to steps S2107 and S2108 to execute the game state setting process. Specifically, first, in step S2107, the high-frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. Based on the high-frequency support mode flag set in this way, in the subsequent electric service support processing, the pass / fail table for the high-frequency support mode is referred to in the support lottery, and the variable display time of the pattern at the time of the support lottery is displayed. It is shortened (specifically set to 2.0 sec), and the period of opening is extended by one opening (specifically set to 5.0 sec).

Unlike the case of the above-mentioned probability variation jackpot result, an upper limit is set for the number of times of support for the high frequency support mode that usually shifts after the jackpot result. In the following step S2108, "100" is set in the game count counter GC stored in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. As a result, the high-frequency support mode is maintained until the game is played 100 times after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and when the game reaches "100", the high-frequency support mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. ..

After the game state setting process is performed in step S2107 and step S2108, the transition process at the end of the main open / close execution mode is terminated as it is.

Returning to the description of step S2105, if a negative determination is made in step S2105, the process proceeds to step S2109. In step S2109, it is determined whether or not the game times that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time correspond to the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the unspecified 2R probability variation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2109, the process proceeds to step S2110 to clear the flag related to the transition of the gaming state. Specifically, the jackpot result correspondence flag (unspecified 2R probability variation flag) stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 is erased, and the high probability mode flag, high frequency winning mode flag, high frequency support mode flag, etc. are set. If it is stored, clear each of those flags.

After executing the erasing process of step S2110, the process proceeds to step S2111 to execute the game state setting process. Specifically, the high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. Based on the high-probability mode flag set in this way, the winning / losing table for the high-probability mode will be referred to in the winning / losing lottery in the subsequent game rounds. In the case of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, the high frequency support mode flag is not stored unlike the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the 16R probability variation jackpot result. That is, the low frequency support mode is continued for the support mode of the electric accessory 34.

If a negative determination is made in step S2109, that is, if the game times that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time correspond to the special deviation result, the process proceeds to step S2112. In step S2112, the flag related to the transition of the gaming state is deleted. Specifically, the special flag stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 is erased. However, as already explained, in the case of a special deviation result, the game state does not change before and after the open / close execution mode. That is, for example, when the gaming state before the special deviation result corresponds to the low frequency support mode and the low probability mode, the frequency support mode and the low probability also correspond to the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode related to the special deviation result. It will correspond to the mode. On the other hand, if the state before the special deviation result corresponds to the high frequency support mode or the high probability mode, these various flags are retained even after the opening / closing execution mode related to the special deviation result.

As described in detail above, in a game machine of a type in which the game state is changed before and after the open / close execution mode corresponding to the low frequency winning mode, for example, an extreme increase in the number of game balls paid out to the player is increased. By realizing the transition of the gaming state while suppressing it, it is possible to diversify the transition opportunity of the gaming state. However, in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the low frequency winning mode, the expectation of winning the ball into the variable winning device 32 is lower than that in the high frequency winning mode. Therefore, for example, the movement of the variable winning device 32 in the low frequency winning mode. If the player catches the eye of the player, there is a concern that the player may be likely to feel a loss. That is, in order to diversify the transition opportunity of the gaming state and improve the interest of the gaming machine, it is not preferable that the player pays attention to the variable winning device 32 in the low frequency winning mode. Here, in the present embodiment, a device is devised to prevent the player's attention from being directed to the variable winning device 32 when the game progresses via the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the low frequency winning mode. .. As a part of this device, the setting mode of the fixed display time for each game is different from that of the first embodiment. Therefore, the setting process of the fixed display time in the present embodiment will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38.

(Confirmed display time setting process)
In the confirmation display time setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the game times executed this time in step S2201 correspond to any of the 2R jackpot result, the 16R probability variation jackpot result A, and the special deviation result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2202. In step S2202, a fourth count value (corresponding to "0.2 sec") is set in the fixed display time counter area (fixed display time measuring means) provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. As a result, the fixed display time becomes the fourth fixed display time "0.2 sec".

If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2203. In step S2203, it is determined whether or not the game times executed this time is the 16R probability variation jackpot result B or the 16R normal jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2204. In step S2204, a fifth count value (corresponding to “1.2 sec”) is set in the fixed display time counter area (fixed display time measuring means) provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. As a result, the finalized display time becomes the fifth finalized display time "1.2 sec".

If a negative determination is made in step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2205, it is determined whether or not the game times executed this time is an out-of-normal result corresponding to the reach display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2205, the process proceeds to step S2204. In step S2204, a fifth count value (corresponding to “1.2 sec”) is set in the fixed display time counter area (fixed display time measuring means) provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. As a result, the finalized display time becomes the fifth finalized display time "1.2 sec".

If a negative determination is made in step S2205, that is, if the result is a normal deviation result (complete deviation result) that does not correspond to the reach display, the process proceeds to step S2206. In step S2206, a sixth count value (corresponding to "1.0 sec") is set in the fixed display time counter area (fixed display time measuring means) provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. As a result, the finalized display time becomes the sixth finalized display time "1.0 sec".

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot result or the special off result is obtained, the symbol combination corresponding to the result is displayed through the reach display. Here, when the reach display is not performed, that is, in the game times corresponding to the complete deviation result, the sixth fixed display time "1.0 sec" is basically set as the fixed display time. On the other hand, when the symbol combination corresponding to the normal out-of-order result is displayed after the reach display and when the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result corresponding to the high frequency winning mode is displayed, it is longer than the sixth final display time. The fifth fixed display time "1.2 sec" is set. That is, for example, when a jackpot result that can be expected to be launched is obtained, the fixed display time is extended and a slight margin is added.

On the other hand, when the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result corresponding to the low frequency winning mode is displayed or when the symbol combination corresponding to the special missed result is displayed, the 6th confirmed display time (5th confirmed) Display time) → The fourth confirmed display time is shortened to "0.2 sec".

The information regarding the confirmed display time set in steps S2202, S2204, and S2206 is added to the above-mentioned change command and transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82. The notification / effect control device 82 grasps the fixed display time based on the received variation command.

Here, when shifting to the open / close execution mode in which the ball is not expected to come out, the display of the above symbol combination for a long period of time triggers the player to uselessly pay attention to the open / close execution mode. The transition to the execution mode → the movement of the variable winning device 32 that cannot be expected to enter the ball → the lack of a ball may discourage the player. In this respect, by shortening the confirmation display time, it is conspicuous when the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result corresponding to the low frequency winning mode is displayed and when the symbol combination corresponding to the special off result is displayed. Can be suppressed.

However, the definite display time is provided to notify the player of the game result and clarify the boundary with the subsequent game times, and when the definite display time becomes extremely short, the above notification function is activated. It will not be exhibited well. In this case, the existence of the definite display time may be less significant in exchange for the above effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a device is devised to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience caused by the significance of existence (notification function) of the fixed display time. Hereinafter, the display mode setting process for the open / close execution mode executed by the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39.

(Display mode setting process for open / close execution mode)
In the display mode setting process for the open / close execution mode, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not any of the above opening commands has been received from the main control device 81. If the opening command has not been received, the display mode setting process is terminated as it is. When the opening command is received, as shown in steps S2302 to S2308, the display mode is set according to the type (type 1 opening command to type 4 opening command).

Specifically, in step S2302, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode corresponds to either the 16R probability variation jackpot result B or the 16R normal jackpot result. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first type opening command is received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2302, the process proceeds to step S2303 to execute the first type display mode setting process. When the first type display mode is set, a series of jackpot moving images are displayed from the start to the end (ending display) of the open / close execution mode. By displaying this jackpot video, the player is clearly shown the transition to the open / close execution mode. In addition, on the display screen 41a (detailed in the corner), the number of rounds currently in progress, the number of balls entered (count number), etc. are clearly indicated together with the above video after the opening display indicating the start of the open / close execution mode is completed. Therefore, the convenience of the player is improved, such as facilitating grasping the progress of the opening / closing execution mode executed over a plurality of rounds.

If a negative determination is made in step S2302, the process proceeds to step S2304. In step S2304, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot result A. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a type 2 opening command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2304, the process proceeds to step S2305 to execute the second type display mode setting process. The second type display mode is divided into a first part for the opening display-low frequency winning mode (1st round and 2nd round) and a 2nd part for the high frequency winning mode (3rd round to 16th round). It is roughly divided. Since the second part is the same as the above-mentioned type 1 display mode, the explanation is incorporated.

In the first part, the symbol combination stopped and displayed in the corresponding game times that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode is continuously displayed while maintaining its form (without changing the size, position, etc.). .. That is, the opening display constituting the first part does not clearly indicate the start of the open / close execution mode. Even if the opening display → the opening / closing of the variable winning device 32 is performed, the display of the above symbol combination is continued, and unlike the first type display mode, the number of rounds currently in progress, the number of balls entered (count number), etc. are not specified.

If a negative determination is made in step S2304, the process proceeds to step S2306. In step S2306, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode of this time corresponds to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a type 3 opening command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2306, the process proceeds to step S2307 to execute the third type display mode setting process. In the third type display mode, as in the first part in the second type display mode, the symbol combination stopped and displayed at the corresponding game times that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode is maintained in that form. Continue the display (without changing the size, position, etc.).

If a negative determination is made in step S2306, that is, if a type 4 opening command is received (if it is a special deviation result), the process proceeds to step S2308 to execute the type 4 display mode setting process. In the fourth type display mode, as in the first part in the second type display mode, the symbol combination stopped and displayed at the corresponding game times that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode is maintained in that form. Continue the display (without changing the size, position, etc.).

The type 1 display mode to the type 4 display mode described in detail above are continued until the ending command is received and the ending display is started. In particular, the contents of the first part, the third type display mode, and the fourth type display mode in the second type display mode are common, and a difference may occur when the ending display is performed thereafter. It is configured in. In the present embodiment, a plurality of stages having different background colors of the symbol display device 41 (display screen 41a) are set according to the mode in the normal gaming state. In the ending display, by switching the stage, the subsequent gaming state is suggested.

These stages correspond to the first special stage (red) corresponding to the high probability mode, the second special stage (yellow) corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and the high probability mode and the low probability mode. A third special stage (green) and a low probability mode (blue) are set.

Here, the stage switching process executed by the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40.

(Stage switching process)
In the stage switching process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main control device 81. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, the process proceeds to step S2402. In step S2402, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode this time corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot result or the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2402, the process proceeds to step S2403, and the transition process to the first special stage is executed. As a result, after the display effect in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result or the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result shifts to the ending display, the background of the symbol display device 41 (display screen 41a) turns red during this ending display. It will be changed. As a result, it is clearly shown to the player that the game will be in a gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S2402, the process proceeds to step S2404. In step S2404, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode of this time corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2404, the process proceeds to step S2405 and the transition process to the second special stage is executed. As a result, after the display effect in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16 normal jackpot results shifts to the ending display, the background of the symbol display device 41 (display screen 41a) is changed to yellow during this ending display. .. As a result, it is clearly shown to the player that the game will be in a gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode.

After executing the process of step S2405, the end condition of the second special stage is set in step S2406, and then the stage switching process is ended. In the present embodiment, when the 16R normal jackpot result is obtained, the high frequency support mode is continued until the number of games is "100". Therefore, in step S2406, a specified number of times (“100” times) is set as the end condition. Specifically, "100" is set in the specified number of counters provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 244. The value of this specified number of times counter is subtracted by 1 each time the game times progress, and when it becomes "0", the second special stage ends. As a result, the second special stage is continued until 100 game times are exhausted after the end of the open / close execution mode, that is, until the second special stage falls from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode.

In the present embodiment, when the 16R probability variation jackpot result B and the 16R normal jackpot result are obtained, whichever type is notified before the transition to the open / close execution mode, or during the open / close execution mode. There are cases where it is announced (details are being displayed at the ending). By adopting such a promotion effect, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the player has won the 16R probability variation jackpot result B, which is advantageous for the player, until the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S2404, that is, if the current opening / closing execution mode corresponds to an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special deviation result, the process proceeds to step S2407. In step S2407, the transition process to the third type special stage is executed. As a result, after the display effect in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or the special deviation result shifts to the ending display, the background of the symbol display device 41 (display screen 41a) is green during this ending display. Will be changed to. As a result, it is suggested that the player may be in the high probability mode thereafter.

After executing the process of step S2407, the end condition of the third special stage is set in step S2408, and then the stage switching process is ended. In the present embodiment, a specified number of times (“100” times) is set as the end condition. Specifically, "100" is set in the specified number of counters provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 244. The value of this specified number of times counter is subtracted by 1 each time the game times progress, and becomes "0", so that the second special stage ends. As a result, the third special stage will be continued until 100 game times are exhausted after the opening / closing execution mode is completed.

Returning to the description of step S2401, if a negative determination is made in step S2401, that is, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2409. In step S2409, it is determined whether or not the player is staying in the second special stage or the third special stage. If a negative determination is made in step S2409, the stage switching process is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2409, the process proceeds to step S2410. In step S2410, it is determined whether or not the value of the specified number of times counter has become 0. That is, it is determined whether or not the end conditions of the second special stage and the third special stage with a limited number of times are satisfied. If a negative determination is made in step S2410, the stage switching process is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2410, the process proceeds to step S2411. In step S2411, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in the high probability mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2411, the transition process to the first special stage is performed in step S2412. As a result, the background of the symbol display device 41 (display screen 41a) is changed to red. As a result, it is clearly shown to the player that the current gaming state corresponds to the high probability mode.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2411, the process of shifting to the normal stage is performed in step S2413. As a result, the background of the symbol display device 41 (display screen 41a) is changed to blue. As a result, it is clearly shown to the player that the current gaming state corresponds to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43, the flow of the display effect based on the game progress will be described. FIG. 41 is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of the display effect when the 16R probability variation jackpot result B is obtained, FIG. 42 is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of the display effect when the 16R probability variation jackpot result A is obtained, and FIG. 43 is a 2R diagram. It is the schematic which exemplifies the flow of the production in the case of a big hit result or a special loss result.

(Flow of display effect when 16R probability variation jackpot result B)
As shown in FIG. 41, when the 16R probability variation jackpot result B is obtained, the variation display (scroll display) of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is started on the symbol display device 41 (display screen 41a), and the upper symbol row Z1 → Stop in the order of the lower symbol row Z3 and shift to the reach display. After that, the middle symbol string Z2 is stopped, and the symbol combination (combination of specific symbols) corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result B is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is clarified that the 16R probability variation jackpot result B is obtained.

When the symbol combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result B is stopped and displayed in the corresponding game times, this display is continued for 1.2 sec (confirmed display). After that, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, and the opening display is executed on the display screen 41a instead of the above symbol combination. Specifically, as a message notifying the start of the open / close execution mode, "SUPPER"
LUCKY ”is displayed. After that, as the variable winning device 32 is opened and closed, the display screen 41a displays a predetermined character moving image and the number of rounds.

Here, the game board 24 shown in the present embodiment has a pair of left and right shutters 49a that can be displaced to a closed position that covers the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41 and an open position that does not cover the display screen 41a. A movable effect device 49 is arranged. By arranging the shutter 49a in the closed position, the display screen 41a located behind the shutter 49a is shielded, and the visibility of the design or the like is restricted. The movable effect device 49 is electrically connected to the notification / effect control device 82, and the shutter 49a is configured to be displaced from the open position to the closed position based on the signal from the notification / effect control device 82. ..

When the round game is completed and the display shifts to the ending display, the movable effect device 49 operates and the shutter 49a is displaced from the open position to the closed position. At the same time, the display mode on the display screen 41a is switched to the state before the moving image is displayed (the state in which the symbol combination is stopped and displayed at the corresponding game times). In the example of FIG. 41, since it corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot result B, the mode shifts to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Therefore, the background of the display screen 41a is changed from blue to red accordingly.

After that, the movable effect device 49 operates, and the shutter 49a returns from the closed position to the open position. As a result, the display screen 41a becomes visible again, and it is clearly indicated that, for example, the normal stage has shifted to the first special stage (high probability mode) due to the change in the background color. If you have already stayed in the 1st special stage (during the consecutive villas), the 1st special stage will be maintained.

(Flow of display effect when 16R probability variation jackpot result A)
As shown in FIG. 42, when the 16R probability variation jackpot result A is obtained, the variation display (scroll display) of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is started on the symbol display device 41 (display screen 41a), and the upper symbol row Z1 → Stop in the order of the lower symbol row Z3 and shift to the reach display. After that, the middle symbol string Z2 is stopped, and the symbol combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result A is stopped and displayed. This symbol combination is configured to include the "CHANGE" symbol displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. In the present embodiment, since the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed even in the case of the 2R probability variation jackpot result and the special deviation result, it is not possible to specify which result is the trigger of the open / close execution mode at this point. It has become difficult.

When the symbol combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result A is stopped and displayed in the corresponding game times, this display is continued for 0.2 sec (confirmed display). This fixed display time is shorter than that in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot result B. After that, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, but the notification that the shift to the open / close execution mode is performed is not performed, and even if the opening display is started, the display on the display screen 41a is continued while maintaining the form.

The movable effect device 49 operates at a timing (during the opening display) when a predetermined period has elapsed since the opening display was started. Specifically, the left and right shutters 49a vibrate (reciprocate) to the left and right in a state of slightly protruding to a position facing the display screen 41a. This movement is continued until the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 32 corresponding to the low frequency winning mode is completed (specifically, until the switching to the high frequency winning mode).

After that, the shutter 49a of the movable effect device 49 is arranged at the closed position, and the display screen 41a is temporarily covered. At this timing, "LUCKY" is displayed on the display screen 41a as a message informing the start of the open / close execution mode instead of the above symbol combination. Then, when the shutter 49a returns to the open position (standby position), the message becomes visible. After switching to the high-frequency winning mode, the display screen 41a displays a predetermined character moving image and the number of rounds in accordance with the opening and closing of the variable winning device 32.

When the round game is completed and the display shifts to the ending display, the movable effect device 49 operates and the shutter 49a is displaced from the open position to the closed position. At the same time, the display mode on the display screen 41a is switched to the state before the moving image is displayed (the state in which the symbol combination is stopped and displayed at the corresponding game times). In the example of FIG. 42, since it corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot result A, the mode shifts to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Therefore, the background of the display screen 41a is changed from blue to red accordingly.

After that, the movable effect device 49 operates, and the shutter 49a returns from the closed position to the open position. As a result, the display screen 41a becomes visible again, and it is clearly indicated that the normal stage has shifted to the first special stage (high probability mode) due to the change in the background color.

(Flow of display effect when 2R probability variation jackpot result or special deviation result is obtained)
As shown in FIG. 43, when a 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special deviation result is obtained, the variable display (scroll display) of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is started on the symbol display device 41 (display screen 41a), and the upper part is displayed. It stops in the order of symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3, and shifts to reach display. After that, the middle symbol string Z2 is stopped, and the predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot result and the special deviation result is stopped and displayed. This symbol combination is configured to include the "CHANGE" symbol displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. In the present embodiment, since the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed even when the 16R probability variation jackpot result A is set, the trigger of the open / close execution mode is the 2R probability variation jackpot result, the special deviation result, and the 16R probability variation jackpot result A at this point. It is difficult to identify which of these is.

When the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the corresponding game times, this display is continued for 0.2 sec (confirmed display). This fixed display time is shorter than that in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot result B. After that, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, but the notification that the shift to the open / close execution mode is performed is not performed, and even if the opening display is started, the display on the display screen 41a is continued while maintaining the form.

The movable effect device 49 operates at a timing (during the opening display) when a predetermined period has elapsed since the opening display was started. Specifically, the left and right shutters 49a vibrate (reciprocate) to the left and right in a state of slightly protruding to a position facing the display screen 41a. This movement is continued until the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 32 corresponding to the low frequency winning mode is completed (specifically, until the ending display is switched). After that, the shutter 49a of the movable effect device 49 is arranged at the closed position, and the display screen 41a is temporarily covered. This series of flow is the same as in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot result A.

At this timing, the background of the display screen 41a is changed. Specifically, the background is changed from blue to red when the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is triggered, and the background is changed from blue to green when the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or special deviation result is the trigger. Will be done. After that, the movable effect device 49 operates, and the shutter 49a returns from the closed position to the open position. As a result, the display screen 41a becomes visible again, and it is clearly indicated that the normal stage has shifted to the special stage (first special stage or third special stage) due to the change in the background color.

That is, at this point, either the 2R probability variation jackpot result and the special deviation result, or the 16R probability variation jackpot result A will be taught. In addition, the transition to the first special stage teaches that it is an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and the transition to the third special stage teaches that it is either an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special deviation result. It will be.

Here, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 44, the flow of the game when a 2R jackpot result or a special deviation result is obtained will be described. In the following description, for convenience, the 2R jackpot result or the special off result will be collectively referred to as the "special result".

After the variation display of the symbol and the variation display of the symbol related to the previous game round are completed at the timing of td0, the timing of td1 in which a predetermined fixed display time (off reach display: 1.2 sec in FIG. 44) has elapsed. Move on to the next game. Then, at the timing of td1, the variation display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 and the variation display of the symbol on the operation port display unit of the main display unit 43 are started. Since this game round corresponds to a special result, the normal variable display is changed to the reach display at the timing of td2. After that, at the timing of td3, the predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the special result is stopped and displayed on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the predetermined display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 43 corresponds to the special result. The pattern is stopped and displayed.

At the timing of td4 when the fixed display time (0.2 sec) corresponding to the special result elapses from the timing of td3, the gaming state is switched from the normal gaming state (normal mode) to the special gaming state (open / close execution mode). Even after the opening / closing execution mode is entered, the predetermined design stopped and displayed on the operation port display unit of the main display unit 43 continues to be displayed as it is, and the predetermined design stopped and displayed on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41. The display of the symbol combination of is continued while maintaining its form. At the timing of td5, the shutter 49a of the movable effect device 49 starts the vibration (hereinafter referred to as a fanning operation).

After that, the variable winning device 32 is opened at each timing of td6 and td7. During this period, the shutter 49a of the movable effect device 49, which has continued the fanning operation, moves to the closed position at the timing of td8 when the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 32 is completed and the ending display is started. Under the situation where the display screen 41a is covered by the shutter 49a, the background color is changed (stage is changed), and the shutter 49a of the movable effect device 49 returns to the open position (standby position) at the timing of td9. .. As a result, the display screen 41a becomes visible again, and it is taught that the stage has been changed.

At the timing of td10 when the ending display ends, the game state is switched from the special game state (open / close execution mode) to the normal game state (normal mode), and the variable display of the symbol stopped and displayed on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41. Then, the variable display of the pattern stopped and displayed on the operation port display unit of the main display unit 43 is started.

In the present embodiment, the effect mode of the open / close execution mode corresponding to the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result and the effect mode of the open / close execution mode corresponding to the special deviation result are common throughout, but this is not necessarily the case. Not limited. For example, a case where the shutter 49a closes and a case where the shutter 49a does not close after the fanning operation by the movable effect device 49 is provided, and a difference is provided so that the former is more likely to be in the high probability mode than the latter. May be. Even if the stage shifts to the same third special stage, the degree of attention to the movement of the movable effect device 49 can be suitably improved by providing a difference in the degree of expectation of the high-probability mode depending on the circumstances. Can be done.

(Flow of display effect when 16R probability variation jackpot result A)
Regarding the flow of the display effect when the 16R probability variation jackpot result A is obtained, the first half portion (first part) is the same as the case where the above special result is obtained. Specifically, as shown in the timing chart of FIG. 45, after the variation display of the symbol and the variation display of the symbol related to the previous game round are completed at the timing of te0, a predetermined fixed display time (in FIG. 45). The game moves to the next game at the timing of te1 when the reach display (1.2 sec) has elapsed. Then, at the timing of te1, the variation display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 and the variation display of the symbol on the operation port display unit of the main display unit 43 are started. Since this game round corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot result A, the normal variation display is shifted to the reach display at the timing of te2. After that, at the timing of te3, a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result A is stopped and displayed on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41, and a special result is supported on the operation port display unit of the main display unit 43. The predetermined pattern to be displayed is stopped and displayed.

At the timing of te4 when the confirmed display time (0.2 sec) corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result A has elapsed from the timing of te3, the gaming state is switched from the normal gaming state (normal mode) to the special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode). Even after the opening / closing execution mode is entered, the predetermined design stopped and displayed on the operation port display unit of the main display unit 43 continues to be displayed as it is, and the predetermined design stopped and displayed on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41. The display of the symbol combination of is continued while maintaining its form. At the timing of te5, the shutter 49a of the movable effect device 49 starts the vibration (hereinafter referred to as a fanning operation).

After that, the variable winning device 32 is opened at each timing of te6 and te7. During this period, the shutter 49a of the movable effect device 49, which had been continuously fanned, moves to the closed position at the timing of te8 when the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 32 related to the low frequency winning mode is completed and the mode shifts to the high frequency winning mode. .. In a situation where the display screen 41a is covered by the shutter 49a, a message (“LUCKY”) indicating that the open / close execution mode corresponding to the high frequency winning mode has been set is displayed, and the movable effect device 49 is displayed at the timing of te9. The shutter 49a returns to the open position (standby position). As a result, the display screen 41a becomes visible again, and it is taught that the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the high frequency winning mode has been set.

Timing of te10 The display ends, and the variable winning device 32 is opened at the timing of ta11.

In this way, if it is a special result, the timing of the above td9, and if it is the 16R probability variation jackpot result A, which jackpot result is obtained until the timing of te9 is reached, by looking at the symbol display device 41 and the movable effect device 49. It is difficult to identify.

According to the fourth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A lottery is held to decide whether or not to shift to the open / close execution mode as the "special game state" when the ball enters the ball entry units 33d and 33e, and if the lottery is won, the variable winning device 32 is entered. The sphere is facilitated. As the opening / closing execution mode, the one corresponding to the high frequency winning mode (opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result) and the one corresponding to the low frequency winning mode (opening / closing execution corresponding to the special result) set so as to cause a difference in the chance of winning a ball A mode) is provided, and by adopting such a configuration, it is possible to realize the transition of the game state while suppressing the privilege such as the prize ball given to the player, for example. As a result, it is possible to realize diversification of the transition opportunity of the game state.

However, in the gaming machine in which the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode are set, it is possible to realize diversification of the transition opportunity of the gaming state, but on the other hand, the ball is entered into the variable winning device 32 in the low-frequency winning mode. There is concern that the lower expectations compared to the high-frequency winning mode will make it easier for the player to feel a loss if, for example, the movement of the variable winning device 32 in the low-frequency winning mode is noticed by the player. Will be done.

Here, in the present embodiment, the fixed display time is 0, which is shorter than the normal (1.0 sec or 1.2 sec), in the corresponding game times that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the low frequency winning mode. .2 sec is set. By shortening the confirmation display time and promptly shifting to the open / close execution mode, it is possible to start the operation of the variable winning device 32 while the game times (confirmation display) are normally continued. That is, by starting the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 32 while the player is still gazing at the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41, the opening / closing operation is noticed by the player. It is possible to suppress.

When the open / close execution mode corresponding to the relatively advantageous high-frequency winning mode is adopted, it is a good opportunity to raise the degree of attention to the game. Therefore, the attractiveness of the game can be suitably appealed by lengthening the stop display period in the corresponding game times that triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the high-frequency winning mode. On the other hand, in the case of the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the relatively disadvantageous low-frequency winning mode, there is a possibility that the player's motivation to play may decrease due to reasons such as not meeting the player's expectations even if the opening / closing execution mode is changed. .. For this reason, it may be better to direct the player's attention to the subsequent game progress instead of the corresponding game time. Therefore, in the game times that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the low-frequency winning mode, the stop display is displayed by configuring the game times to shift to the open / close execution mode as soon as possible instead of unnecessarily extending the corresponding game times. It is possible to preferably suppress the discomfort of the pattern player from becoming a factor that unnecessarily agitates the discomfort.

In the first place, in order to stop and display the symbol combination at the end of the game round, there is a technical significance of visually teaching the player the game result. For this reason, if the confirmed display time is extremely shortened for reasons such as not being the best result for the player as described above, the above-mentioned prerequisite functions may not work well and the player may be confused. Sex arises.

Therefore, when shifting to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the low-frequency winning mode, a certain display period is guaranteed by continuously displaying the stopped symbol combination so as to straddle the corresponding game times-open / close execution mode. Therefore, the occurrence of oversight and the like can be suitably suppressed. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the low frequency winning mode, it may not be preferable that the player's attention is directed to the variable winning device 32. Considering that the player's attention is easily directed to the symbol display device 41 (symbol), the display of the symbol combination is intentionally continued so as to straddle the open / close execution mode, so that the open / close execution mode is set. It is possible to preferably suppress the attention of the player toward the variable winning device 32. In particular, since the continuous display of the symbol combination in the open / close execution mode continues until the operation of the variable winning device 32 is completed, it is possible to more preferably suppress the movement of the variable winning device 32 from being easily noticed.

When the symbol combination is continuously displayed in the low-frequency winning mode, the movable effect device 49 (shutter 49a) operates to execute the fanning effect. As a result, it is expected that the player's attention will be easily directed to the movable effect device 49, and then the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen 41a will change. In this way, by encouraging the player's attention toward the movable effect device 49 and the symbol display device 41, the variable winning device 32 can be made less likely to be noticed by the player.

In a type of gaming machine in which the reach display is performed in the process of showing the game result, in many cases, the off-limits result is usually taught through the reach display. In other words, just because the reach is displayed does not necessarily mean that the jackpot will be won, but rather the result will be out of the ordinary. In consideration of such circumstances, a special result can be obtained by making the period for stopping and displaying the pattern in the corresponding game times-open / close execution mode equal to the reach display → stop display period when the result is out of normal. Even if it is taught to the player, it is possible to approach the flow of the game at the time of the normal deviation result, and the corresponding game times → open / close execution mode → next game times are performed via the open / close execution mode. It is possible to make the presence less noticeable. In addition, the opening / closing execution mode is performed by performing the opening / closing execution mode using the difference between the final display time of the game times related to the special result and the final display time of the game times related to other results. It can be made inconspicuous.

In this way, when shifting to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the low frequency winning mode, the player's consciousness is opened / closed by emphasizing that the special result was obtained by the internal lottery instead of the open / close execution mode itself. Instead of the mode, it can be directed to the game state that shifts after that. As a result, even if the variable winning device 32 operates so as not to substantially generate a ball, it can be suppressed that it causes discomfort to the player.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration and the fourth embodiment are provided in that the confirmation display time is shortened at the corresponding game times that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the low frequency winning mode. Although they match, a characteristic configuration is adopted to further facilitate the switching of the game state via the open / close execution mode. Hereinafter, structural differences will be described first with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. 46 is a partially enlarged view of the game board 24X showing the variable winning unit 32X and its peripheral structure in an enlarged manner, and FIG. 47 is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 46.

(Variable winning unit 32X)
A right route, which is mainly used in the high frequency support mode or the open / close execution mode, is formed in the portion from the upper side to the right side of the central opening (design display device 41) in the game board 24X. An opening is provided at a position on the 24X that is an intermediate position of the right route (specifically, above the symbol display device 41).

The opening penetrates in the thickness direction of the game board 24X (see FIG. 6), and as shown in FIG. 5, the variable winning unit 32X is fitted into the opening from the front of the game machine. In the state where the variable winning unit 32X is arranged in this way, the opening is covered with the base body 300X which constitutes the main part of the variable winning unit 32X and is provided with a function as a mounting portion for the game board 24X. ing.

The base body 300X includes a housing 301X formed along the edge of the opening. The housing 301X has a flat plate portion formed so as to be parallel to the front surface of the game board 24X, and a bulging portion that bulges rearward from the flat plate portion to the rear of the game machine. The variable winning unit 32X is integrated with the game board 24X by being screwed to the game board 24X in a state where the flat plate portion is in contact with the front surface of the game board 24X.

As shown in FIG. 47, a substantially flat plate-shaped cover 302X is fixed to the housing 301X from the front of the game machine. The cover 302X is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and is configured so that the rear portion thereof can be visually recognized through the cover 302X. In FIG. 46, for convenience of explanation, the portion that can be visually recognized through the cover 302X is indicated by a solid line so as to be close to the state actually visually observed.

The cover 302X is formed so that its outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the housing 301X, and faces the front surface (flat plate portion) of the housing with a gap. The clearance dimension between the flat plate portion and the cover 302X is formed so as to be larger than the diameter dimension of the game ball, and the region sandwiched by these flat plate portions and the cover 302X forms a part of the right route. It is 310X. The passage width (the above-mentioned gap size) of the ball passage 310X is defined so that a plurality of game balls do not pass through the same place at the same time.

The ball passage 310X includes an upstream passage 311X extending in the vertical direction and a downstream passage 312X extending in a direction (specifically, in the horizontal direction) intersecting the upstream passage 311X. The upstream passage 311X is open upward, and the game ball launched to the right route changes its direction by hitting the return member (specifically, the rubber cushion) provided above the variable winning unit 32X and weakening its momentum. By falling due to its own weight, it flows into the ball passage 310X through the open portion of the upstream passage 311X. Hereinafter, among the wall portions forming the ball passage 310X, the wall portion formed by the front surface of the housing 301X is the “back wall portion 315X”, and the wall portion formed by the rear surface of the cover 302X is “front”. It is called "wall part 316X".

A plurality of (specifically, two) variable winning devices are arranged vertically in the upstream passage 311X. The basic configurations of these variable winning devices 330X and 380X are common. Therefore, in the following description, the common points of the two variable winning devices 330X and 380X will be described, and then the differences between the two variable winning devices 330X and 380X will be described.

The variable winning devices 330X and 380X have large winning openings 331X and 381X formed in the back wall portion 315X. The large winning openings 331X and 381X penetrate in the thickness direction (front-back direction) of the back wall portion 315X, and have a substantially rectangular shape (horizontally long shape) extending in the direction (horizontal direction) intersecting the passage direction of the upstream passage 311X. I'm doing it. The housing 301X can be opened and closed so that it can be switched between a state in which the inflow of game balls into the large winning openings 331X and 381X is permitted (hereinafter referred to as an allowable state) and a state in which the inflow is not possible (hereinafter referred to as a blocking state). Doors 332X and 382X are attached.

The opening / closing doors 332X and 382X have a horizontally long shape like the large winning openings 331X and 381X, and can be rotated back and forth because the lower end portion is rotatably supported by the shaft. The housing 301X is provided with drive units 333X, 383X (specifically, solenoids) for driving the opening / closing doors 332X and 382X. The drive units 333X and 383X are electrically connected to the main control device 81 and operate based on the drive signal from the main control device 81. By operating the drive units 333X and 383X, the opening / closing doors 332X and 382X rotate around the shaft support portion (with the lower end portion as the base end) and are arranged in the open position / closed position, thereby winning a variable prize. The devices 330X and 380X are switched to the above-mentioned allowable state / blocked state. That is, the main control device 81 functions as a drive control means for the variable winning devices 330X and 380X.

In the blocked state, the large winning openings 331X and 381X are covered and the protrusion to the ball passage 310X (upstream side passage 311X) is suppressed. In the allowable state, the large winning openings 331X and 381X are opened and the ball passage 310X (upstream side). It protrudes into the passage 311X). When the opening / closing doors 332X and 382X project into the ball passage 310X, the ball passage 310X is cut off, and the flow (fall) of the game ball along the ball passage 310X is hindered. In the permissible state in which the opening / closing doors 332X and 382X protrude into the ball passage 310X, the game ball falling in the ball passage 310X hits the opening / closing doors 332X and 382X, moves to the rear of the game machine, and flows into the large winning openings 331X and 381X. Will be done.

The upstream passage 311X is provided with an offset portion that is offset rearward at an intermediate position (specifically, a position in front of the upper variable winning device 330X) to reach the variable winning devices 330X and 380X. The game ball is devised to move along the back wall portion 315X in the ball passage 310X.

Inflow passages 334X and 384X are formed in the housing 301X on the back side of the large winning openings 331X and 381X so as to communicate with the large winning openings 331X and 381X. The inflow passages 334X and 384X merge so as to form a single line at the downstream part. The game balls that have flowed into the large winning openings 331X and 381X will be guided to the collection passage through the confluence of the inflow passages 334X and 384X.

Detection sensors 335X and 385X for detecting game balls are arranged at intermediate positions (positions on the upstream side of the confluence portion) of the inflow passages 334X and 384X (see FIG. 5). The detection sensors 335X and 385X are electrically connected to the main control device 81, and in the main control device 81, the variable winning devices 330X and 380X are based on the detection information (detection signals) from these detection sensors 335X and 385X. It is configured to individually grasp the winning ball (winning).

With reference to FIG. 46 again, regarding the difference between the upper variable winning device 330X (hereinafter referred to as the upper variable winning device 330X) and the lower variable winning device 380X (hereinafter referred to as the lower variable winning device 380X). explain.

The upper variable winning device 330X is located directly below the return member, and is configured to have a wider width than the entrance portion of the right route. A plurality of game nails 38 are arranged between the entrance portion and the upper variable winning device 330X, and the flow path of the game ball is varied in the width direction (horizontal direction) of the upper variable winning device 330X. , It suppresses the flow path from becoming uniform. However, the width of the upper variable winning device 330X is defined so that almost all of the diversified game balls reach the upper variable winning device 330X. With respect to the game balls launched aiming at the upper variable winning device 330X, if the upper variable winning device 330X is in the allowable state, almost all of them will enter the upper variable winning device 330X. That is, the configuration is such that the spill of the actual game ball is avoided so as to be substantially "0".

The lower variable winning device 380X is arranged at a position directly below the upper variable winning device 330X. The lower variable winning device 380X is attached to the upper variable winning device 330X so that the distance from the upper variable winning device 330X is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. The lower large winning opening 381X and the lower opening / closing door 382X of the lower variable winning device 380X extend in the same direction as the upper large winning opening 331X and the upper opening / closing door 332X of the upper variable winning device 330X. However, its longitudinal dimension (width) is configured to be smaller than the upper winning opening 331X.

Specifically, the right end portion of the lower variable winning device 380X is located on the left side of the right end portion of the upper variable winning device 330X. The gaps at both ends are slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As described above, the substantial flow range of the game ball in the upstream passage 311X is defined to be the same width as the upper variable winning device 330X. Therefore, the game ball that flows down the right limit position of the flow-down range (the game ball that passes through the right end of the upper variable winning device 330X) passes to the right of the lower variable winning device 380X, and thus falls below. It will move so as to bypass the side variable winning device 380X.

Further, the left end portion of the lower variable winning device 380X is located on the right side of the left end portion of the upper variable winning device 330X. The gaps at both ends are slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As described above, the substantial flow range of the game ball in the upstream passage 311X is defined to be the same width as the upper variable winning device 330X. For this reason, a game ball that flows down the left limit position of the flow range (a game ball that passes through the left end of the upper variable winning device 330X) passes to the left of the lower variable winning device 380X, and thus falls below the game ball. It will move so as to bypass the side variable winning device 380X.

As described above, with respect to the upper variable winning device 330X and the lower variable winning device 380X, a difference is set in the winning probability of the game ball launched to the right route due to the difference in width. That is, when the target in the permissible state is the lower variable winning device 380X, the ball winning probability is lower than in the case where the target in the permissible state is the upper variable winning device 330X, and inevitably a predetermined number ( In the present embodiment, the time required for entering 10 balls) is also longer in the former than in the latter. If a jackpot is won and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode (specifically, the open / close execution mode corresponding to the high-frequency winning mode), the game can be advanced by firing a game ball aiming at the right route. In this case, by changing the target in the permissible state for each round (by mixing the target in the permissible state), it is possible to cause a rhythm of the game progress and suppress the monotonousness of the game progress. It has become.

For a game ball that has passed through the upstream passage 311X of the ball passage 310X, that is, a game ball that has not entered any of the variable winning devices 330X and 380X, the downstream side provided below the lower variable winning device 380X. Move to passage 312X. Here, a supplementary explanation will be given to the downstream passage 312X.

The downstream passage 312X is inclined downward from the center of the game board 24X to the right side, and the bottom portion 317X thereof is formed by the upper surface portion of the center frame 42X. The game ball that has moved from the upstream passage 311X to the downstream passage 312X is deenergized by hitting the bottom 317X, and moves to the side of the symbol display device 41 (display screen 41a) along the bottom 317. ..

The variable winning unit 32X (variable winning devices 330X, 380X) in the present embodiment is maintained in the blocked state outside the open / close execution mode, and switches from the blocked state to the allowable state when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the open / close execution mode. .. Here, with reference to FIG. 47, the operation mode of the variable winning unit 32X in the open / close execution mode will be described.

If both of the two variable winning devices 330X and 380X are maintained in the blocked state, it is impossible to enter the variable winning unit 32X. Here, when the upper variable winning device 330X is switched from the blocked state to the allowable state (see the two-dot chain line), the upstream passage 311X is cut off by the upper opening / closing door 332X, and almost all of the game balls flowing down the right route are large on the upper side. The ball will enter the winning opening 331X. During the period in which the upper variable winning device 330X is in the allowable state, the lower variable winning device 380X is maintained in the blocking state.

In this state, the upper variable winning device 330X is based on the condition that either the preset allowable period (opening period) elapses or the preset number (predetermined number) of balls are generated. It switches from the allowable state to the blocked state. After that, both variable winning devices 330X and 380X are maintained in the blocked state for a predetermined interval period.

After this interval period elapses, the lower variable winning device 380X switches from the blocked state to the allowed state (see the alternate long and short dash line). When the lower variable winning device 380X is switched to the allowable state, the upstream passage 311X is cut off by the lower opening / closing door 382X, and the game ball flowing down the right route enters the lower large winning opening 381X. As described above, during the period during which the lower variable winning device 380X is in the allowable state, the upper variable winning device 330X is maintained in the allowable state.

In this state, the lower variable winning device 380X is based on the condition that either the preset allowable period (opening period) elapses or the preset number (predetermined number) of balls are generated. Switches from the allowable state to the blocked state. After that, both variable winning devices 330X and 380X are maintained in the blocked state for a predetermined interval period.

The game balls that did not enter the variable winning devices 330X and 380X move from the upstream passage 311X to the downstream passage 312X, and are guided to the area on the side of the symbol display device 41 through the ball passage 310X. It will be.

Incidentally, in the open / close execution mode, the variable winning devices 330X and 380X are set to be in the allowable state in a predetermined order, and it is avoided that both the two variable winning devices 330X and 380X are in the allowable state. ..

A decorative body 48X is arranged on the center frame 42X so as to be located in front of the lower variable winning device 380X among these two variable winning devices 330X and 380X. The portion of the lower variable winning device 380X that overlaps with the decorative body 48X is restricted so that it cannot be seen from the front of the game machine. Further, the portion of the ball passage 310X described above that is downstream of the lower variable winning device 380X is also restricted so as to be invisible by the decorative body 48X.

As described above, during the game, the player's attention is focused exclusively on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41. Therefore, by making the lower variable winning device 380X smaller than the upper variable winning device 330X, the lower variable winning device 380X is less likely to be noticed. Then, by covering a part of the lower variable winning device 380X with the decorative body 48X,
Since the symbol display device 41 having the display screen 41a has a configuration that makes it easy for the player to pay attention to it, its visibility is suitably guaranteed by arranging it so as to be located in front of the player's face. ing. Therefore, in this type of gaming machine, by arranging the variable winning unit 32X above the symbol display device 41, the player can use the variable winning unit 32X (lower variable winning device 380X) located behind the decorative body 48X. It is possible to ensure visibility by the hall manager (for example, the hall manager who is patrolling the hall or the hall manager who monitors using a camera placed on the ceiling, etc.) while making it difficult to see from the outside. it can. According to the combination with the configuration in which the variable winning unit 32X is operated when the gaming state is changed via the open / close execution mode corresponding to the low frequency winning mode, for example, the change in the gaming state is normal while enjoying the above-mentioned effect. It will be possible for the hall manager to visually confirm the existence.

Since the variable winning unit 32X is configured to allow entry in the first place, when the game ball that has reached the vicinity of the variable winning unit 32X disappears from the game area PE, the result of the disappearance of the game ball is traced back to the allowable state ( It is feared that it will be easier for the player to understand the fact that the mode has been changed to the open / close execution mode. In particular, for a game ball that is periodically launched by a launch operation, some rhythm occurs in the flow. Therefore, it is assumed that the function that makes it difficult to understand the transition to the open / close execution mode based on the above event does not work well.

In this regard, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, not only the lower variable winning device 380X constituting the variable winning unit 32X but also the downstream portion of the ball passage 310X is shielded by the decorative body 48X. Even if a ball enters the variable winning unit 32X, the entry can be made inconspicuous. For the above reasons, it is possible to preferably suppress that the switching to the open / close execution mode is easily grasped due to the occurrence of the ball entering.

The portion of the ball passage 310X covered by the decorative body 48X (specifically, the bottom 317) functions as a "deceleration portion" for decelerating the game ball by changing the moving direction of the game ball along the ball passage 310X.

In this way, the space between the game balls fired at a predetermined cycle is narrowed directly under the lower variable winning device 380X, and the game ball group becomes sparse → dense near the lower variable winning device 380X. As a result, even if some of the game balls enter the lower variable winning device 380X during the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the low frequency winning mode, the winning balls can be made inconspicuous.

The deceleration function can be realized by, for example, arranging a plurality of game nails 38 and the like to variously change (disturb) the flow of the game ball. However, if the flow of the game ball is disturbed in the vicinity of the lower variable winning device 380X, it becomes a factor that hinders the movement of the lower variable winning device 380X, or excessive ball entry to the lower variable winning device 380X occurs. It becomes a factor. In particular, in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the low frequency winning mode, it is suggested to the player that the occurrence of a ball entering the lower variable winning device 380X and the disorder of the operation of the lower variable winning device 380X have become the opening / closing execution mode. It can be an opportunity.

In this regard, if the flow path is changed from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction on the downstream side of the lower variable winning device 380X as described above, the above-mentioned description is made while suppressing excessive disturbance of the behavior of the game ball. The change from sparse to dense can be preferably generated.

In particular, the game ball that has passed through the lower variable winning device 380X moves along the passage bottom 317X formed by the center frame 42X, and the flow direction thereof changes from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction. By defining the flow path by the center frame 42X in this way, it is possible to preferably suppress the complexity of the configuration for exerting the deceleration function described above.

As described above, the variable winning unit 32X shown in the present embodiment is formed by combining two variable winning devices 330X and 380X, and the operation mode thereof is different from that of the fourth embodiment. Therefore, the large winning opening opening / closing process in the present embodiment will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48.

(Opening and closing of the winning opening)
In the large winning opening opening / closing process, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not any of the upper large winning opening 331X and the lower large winning opening 381X is open. Specifically, such a determination is made based on the driving states of the variable winning drive units 333X and 383X in the variable winning unit 32X. If the large winning openings 331X and 381X are not open, it is determined in step S2502 whether or not the value of the open number counter OC is "0". If an affirmative decision is made in step S2502, the opening / closing process of the main prize opening is terminated as it is.

If a negative determination is made in step S2502, the process proceeds to step S2503. In step S2503, it is determined whether or not the value of the open number counter OC is an even number. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, the process proceeds to step S2504 to determine whether or not the value of the first open timer counter TC1 is "0". The first open timer counter TC1 is a counter that is referred to when grasping the open period or interval period of the lower winning opening 381X, and its value is set to "1" each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is executed. It is subtracted one by one. If a negative determination is made in step S2504, the opening / closing process of the winning opening of the main prize is terminated.

If the value of the open number counter OC is an even number (odd number round) and the value of the first open timer counter TC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S2505, and the upper large winning opening 331X in the variable winning unit 32X is opened. Execute the process. Specifically, the upper variable winning drive unit 333X is set to the driving state in order to open the upper large winning opening 331X. After that, the processes of steps S2506 to S2508 and steps S2514 are executed as the closing condition setting process (opening setting process) corresponding to the variable winning unit 32X (upper large winning opening 331X).

In step S2506, it is determined whether or not the high frequency winning mode is supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S2506, the process proceeds to step S2507, "15000" (corresponding to 30 sec) is set in the first open timer counter TC1, and "10" is set in the winning counter PC in the following step S2514. .. If a negative determination is made in step S2506, "50" (corresponding to 0.1 sec) is set in the first open timer counter TC1, and "10" is set in the winning counter PC in subsequent step S2514.

Returning to the description of step S2503, if a negative determination is made in step S2503, that is, if it is determined that the value of the open number counter OC is an odd number, the process proceeds to step S2509. In step S2509, it is determined whether or not the value of the second open timer counter TC2 is "0". The second open timer counter TC2 is a counter that is referred to when grasping the open period or interval period of the lower winning opening 381, and its value is set to "1" each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is executed. It is subtracted one by one. If a negative determination is made in step S2509, the opening / closing process of the winning opening is terminated.

If the value of the open number counter OC is an odd number (even round) and the value of the second open timer counter TC2 is "0", the process proceeds to step S2510, and the lower large winning opening 381X in the variable winning unit 32X Execute the release process. Specifically, the lower variable winning drive unit 383X is set to the driving state in order to open the lower large winning opening 381X. After that, the processes of steps S251 to S2513 and steps S2514 are executed as the closing condition setting process (opening setting process) corresponding to the variable winning unit 32X (lower side large winning opening 381X).

In step S2511, it is determined whether or not the high frequency winning mode is supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S2511, the process proceeds to step S2512, "15000" (corresponding to 30 sec) is set in the second open timer counter TC2, and "10" is set in the winning counter PC in the following step S2514. .. If a negative determination is made in step S2511, "50" (corresponding to 0.1 sec) is set in the second open timer counter TC2, and "10" is set in the winning counter PC in the following step S2514.

That is, in the variable winning unit 32X in the present embodiment, the upper variable winning device 330X is opened in the odd rounds (1st round, 3rd round, 5th round, ..., 13th round, 15th round). In even-numbered rounds (2nd round, 4th round, 6th round, ..., 14th round, 16th round), the lower variable winning device 380X is configured to be opened and opened / closed. The upper variable winning device 330X and the lower variable winning device 380X are alternately opened until the mode ends.

More specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 49 (a), in the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special deviation result, it is relative to the symbol display device 41 (display screen 41a) as the symbol display means. The upper variable winning device 330X, which is farther away, → the lower variable winning device 380X, which is relatively close to the symbol display device 41, is switched to the allowable state in this order. Further, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 49B, in the case of 16R normal jackpot result, 16R probability variation jackpot result A, and 16R probability variation jackpot result B, the upper variable winning device 330X → the lower variable winning device 380X → The upper variable winning device 330X → ... → upper variable winning device 330X → lower variable winning device 380X switches to the allowable state in this order.

Here, the opening time of each of the variable winning devices 330X and 380X will be supplementarily described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 50B.

In the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot result and the special deviation result, the upper variable winning device 330X is first switched from the blocked state to the allowable state in the first round, and the upper jackpot 331X is opened. After that, in the second round, the lower variable winning device 380X is switched from the blocking state to the permissible state, and the lower large winning opening 381 is opened. However, the opening time of each of these large winning openings 331X and 381X is "0.1 sec", which is more than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) when the game ball is repeatedly fired based on the firing operation. It is set to be short. That is, in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot result and the special deviation result, the opening period is limited so that the ball does not substantially enter.

Next, in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot result and the 16R probability variation jackpot result B, the upper variable winning device 330X is first switched from the blocked state to the allowable state in the first round, and the upper jackpot 331X is opened. The Rukoto. After that, in the second round, the lower variable winning device 380X is switched from the blocking state to the permissible state, and the lower large winning opening 381X is opened. In the third round, the upper variable winning device 330X is switched from the blocked state to the allowable state again, and the upper large winning opening 331X is opened. After that, in the fourth round, the lower variable winning device 380X is switched from the blocked state to the allowable state again, and the lower large winning opening 381X is opened. After that, the opening will be repeated until the 16th round is reached in the same manner.

The opening time of each of these large winning openings 331X and 381X is "30 sec", which is sufficiently longer than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) when the game ball is repeatedly fired based on the firing operation. It is set. That is, in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result B and the 16R normal jackpot result, the opening period is defined so that the entry in the first round to the 16th round is guaranteed.

Next, in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result A, the upper variable winning device 330X is first switched from the blocking state to the permissible state in the first round, and the upper jackpot 331X is opened. After that, in the second round, the lower variable winning device 380X is switched from the blocking state to the permissible state, and the lower large winning opening 381X is opened. The opening time of each of these large winning openings 331X and 381X is "0.1 sec", which is sufficiently shorter than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) when the game ball is repeatedly fired based on the firing operation. Is set to. That is, in the first round to the second round, the opening period is limited so that the ball does not actually enter.

On the other hand, after the third round, the upper variable winning device 330X and the lower variable winning device 380X are alternately switched to the allowable state while following the above-mentioned opening order. However, the opening time of each of these large winning openings 331X and 381X is "30 sec", which is sufficiently longer than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) when the game ball is repeatedly fired based on the firing operation. Is set to. That is, in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result B, the opening period is defined so that the ball is secured in all the rounds 1 to 16.

After executing the process of step S2514, an open command indicating that the variable winning unit 32X has been released is set in step S2515, and the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed. This set release command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The notification / effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the release based on the received release command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

Returning to the description of step S2501, if it is determined in step S2501 that either the lower large winning opening 381X or the upper large winning opening 331X is open, the process proceeds to step S2516, and the first open timer counter TC1 and It is determined whether or not the value of the second open timer counter TC2 corresponding to the large winning opening being opened (hereinafter, referred to as “open timer counter TC” for convenience of explanation) is “0”. If the value of the open timer counter TC is not "0", the process proceeds to step S2517, and it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the lower grand prize opening 381X and the upper grand prize opening 331X that are to be opened. Judgment is made based on the detection signals from the detection sensors 335X and 385X corresponding to the variable winning unit 32X. If no prize has been won, the opening / closing process of the main prize opening is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when a prize has been won, the output process of the prize command is executed in step S2518. The winning command is output to the notification / effect control device 82, and the effect in the open / close execution mode executed on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41 is changed by the winning command.

After executing the command output process in step S2518, the process proceeds to step S2519. In step S2519, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1, and in the following step S2520, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0". If it is not "0", the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is performed as it is. finish.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S2520, that is, when the value of the winning counter PC is "0", or when a positive judgment is made in step S2516 (that is, it is determined that the value of the open timer counter TC is "0". If), it means that the conditions for closing the large winning opening have been met. In this case, in step S2521, the upper variable winning drive unit 333X and the lower variable winning drive unit 383X are supported in order to close the lower large winning opening 381X and the upper large winning opening 331X that are to be opened. The thing to be driven (the one that is in the driven state) is set to the non-driven state.

In the following step S2522, the update processing of the open number counter OC is executed. Specifically, when the value of the open number counter OC is not "0", the open number counter OC is decremented by 1, and when the value of the open number counter OC is "0", the open number counter OC is performed. Keep the value of "0".

After that, in step S2523, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to shift to the high-frequency winning mode by referring to the updated value of the open number counter OC and the type of jackpot that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. In the present embodiment, when the 16 probability variation jackpot result A is obtained, the mode shifts from the low frequency winning mode to the high frequency winning mode in the middle of the opening / closing execution mode (when a predetermined round is reached). Specifically, with the end of the second round, the mode shifts from the low frequency winning mode to the high frequency winning mode. Therefore, in the process of step S2523, it is determined whether or not the value of the open number counter OC is "14". Then, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2523, the high-frequency winning mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 in step S2524.

After executing the process of step S2524, or when a positive determination is made in step S2523, the process proceeds to step S2525. In step S2525, it is determined whether or not the value of the open number counter OC is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S2525, the process proceeds to step S2526 to determine whether or not the high-frequency winning mode is set.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2565, the process proceeds to step S2527. In step S2527, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated open number counter OC is an even number. When it is determined in step S2527 that the value of the open number counter OC is an even number, that is, when it is determined that the next round to be executed is an odd round, the first open timer counter TC1 is set to "1000" (2). (Equivalent to 0.0 sec) is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2527 that the value of the open number counter OC is an odd number, that is, when it is determined that the next round to be executed is an even round, the second open timer counter TC2 is set to "1000". Set (corresponding to 2.0 sec).

Returning to the description of step S2526, if a negative determination is made in step S2526, the process proceeds to step S2530. In step S2530, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated open number counter OC is an even number. When it is determined in step S2530 that the value of the open number counter OC is an even number, that is, when it is determined that the next round to be executed is an even number, the first open timer counter TC1 is set to "150" (0). .3 sec) is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2530 that the value of the open number counter OC is an odd number, that is, when it is determined that the next round to be executed is an even round, the second open timer counter TC2 is set to "150". (Equivalent to 0.3 sec) is set.

After executing the processes of steps S2528, S2529, S2531, and S2532, the closing command is set in step S2533, and the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed. This set closing command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The notification / effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the closing command based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

Returning to the description of step S2525, if it is determined in step S2525 that the value of the open number counter OC is "0", the process proceeds to step S2534. In step S2534, the ending process is executed. In the start process, an ending waiting time for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the open / close execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in the waiting time counter areas provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 204.

After that, after setting the ending command in step S2535, the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12).

In the present embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment, the 2R probability variation jackpot result, the special deviation result, and the 16R probability variation jackpot result A (previous stage portion) are produced for the opening / closing execution mode in the corresponding game times. It is configured to continue the symbol combination displayed as stopped while maintaining its form. Here, a certain relationship is given to the fixed display time, the execution time of the open / close execution mode, and the time during which the display of the symbol combination is continued in the open / close execution mode, and by utilizing these relationships, The open / close execution mode corresponding to the low frequency winning mode is made inconspicuous. Here, the definite display time in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 50 (a), and then the opening / closing execution corresponding to the low frequency winning mode will be performed with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 50 (b). The flow of the game (opening / closing execution mode) in the mode will be described.

(Confirmed display time)
As shown in FIG. 50 (a), "1.0 sec" is set as the definite display time in the game times corresponding to the complete deviation result. On the other hand, "1.2 sec" is set as the definite display time in the game times corresponding to the off-reach display, the game times corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result B, and the game times corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot result. On the other hand, "0.2 sec" is set as the fixed display time in the game times corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result A, the game times corresponding to the 2R jackpot result, and the game times corresponding to the special deviation result.

If you want to draw the player's attention to the confirmation display itself, that is, in the case of a jackpot result of high frequency winning mode confirmation in which the player's profit acquisition is confirmed, by making the confirmation display time longer than the normal confirmation display time, It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the confirmed display result. On the other hand, if you do not want the player to pay attention to the confirmation display itself, that is, if you do not want the open / close execution mode to stand out as much as possible, that is, if the result is a big hit or a special loss result of the low frequency winning mode confirmation, the confirmation display time is displayed as a normal confirmation By making it shorter than the time, etc., it is possible to prevent the finalized display result from being unnecessarily conspicuous.

However, the technical significance of performing the definite display is to clearly indicate the game result to the player. Therefore, when the definite display time is extremely shortened as described above, it becomes difficult to operate the function well. Therefore, in order to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience, when the fixed display time = "0.2 sec", the display of the symbol combination stopped and displayed in the corresponding game times is displayed in the open / close execution mode. Is also configured to continue while maintaining its form. Here, with reference to FIG. 50B, various time setting modes in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the low frequency winning mode will be described.

(Flow of open / close execution mode)
In the open / close execution mode corresponding to either the 2R jackpot result or the special miss result, the opening display of the opening / closing execution mode start is executed for "0.2 sec", and the opening / closing operation of the variable winning unit 32X is performed after the opening display ends. Start. As described above, the launch cycle of the game ball based on the launch operation of the game ball is "0.6 sec", and the round end condition is the elapse of a predetermined time (30 sec) or a predetermined number (10) of prizes. However, the opening time of the variable winning devices 330X and 380X is "0.1 sec". Therefore, it is substantially avoided that the latter of the above two conditions is satisfied. Under these circumstances, the opening time of the variable winning devices 330X and 380X is "0.1 sec". The interval period during which both the variable winning devices 330X and 380X are closed is "0.3 sec", which is open ("0.1 sec") → interval ("0.3 sec") → open ("0.3 sec"). After a "0.1 sec") → interval ("0.3 sec"), the ending display is displayed. After the ending display is executed for "0.2 sec", the open / close execution mode ends.

Here, in the upper variable winning device 330X according to the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball flowing into the upper large winning opening 331X to reach the detection sensor 335X via the inflow passage 334X is "0.6 sec". .. That is, the game ball that has won the upper variable winning device 330X in the first round passes through the detection sensor 335X (discharged from the upper variable winning device 330X) before the transition to the ending display due to the existence of the interval period. It has become. On the other hand, the lower variable winning device 380X is smaller than the upper large winning opening 331X, and the time required for the game ball flowing into the lower large winning opening 381X to reach the detection sensor 385X via the inflow passage 384X. Is "0.3 sec", which is shorter than the upper variable winning device 330X. That is, the game ball that has won the lower variable winning device 380X in the second round passes through the detection sensor 385X before the transition to the ending display due to the existence of the interval period (discharged from the lower variable winning device 380X). It is composed.

In this way, by using the two variable winning devices 330X and 380X together and configuring both to be opened once, opening and closing execution is performed while ensuring the ejection time of the game ball if a winning occurs. It is possible to reduce the time required for the mode.

Explaining the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result A, the flow of the first half part (the part corresponding to the low frequency winning mode: the first part) of the opening / closing execution mode is the 2R probability variation jackpot result and the special deviation result. It is the same as when it becomes. Specifically, the opening display for starting the open / close execution mode is executed for "0.2 sec", and the open / close operation of the variable winning unit 32X starts after the opening display ends. In the opening / closing operation, after the end of opening (“0.1 sec”) → interval (“0.3 sec”) → opening (“0.1 sec”), the interval is extended to “2.0 sec” and the opening time is extended. Will also be extended to "30 sec". After 16 rounds have elapsed, the opening / closing execution mode ends after the ending display is executed for "5.0 sec".

Here, with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, the flow of the game when a 2R jackpot result or a special off result (special result) is obtained will be described. FIG. 51 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when a special result is obtained, and FIG. 52 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the final display time and the stop display time of the symbol when the special result is obtained.

(Flow of the game when a special result is obtained)
As shown in FIG. 51, the basic game flow (te1 to te3, etc.) until a special result is obtained is the same as that of the fourth embodiment. When the corresponding game round starts at the timing of te4, the variation display mode of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 (display screen 41a) develops from the normal variation display to the reach display at the timing of te5. After that, when the fluctuation display of the symbol is stopped at the timing of te6 and the symbol combination corresponding to the special result is stopped and displayed, this display continues until the timing of te7 after 0.2 sec.

At the timing of te7, the game state is switched from the normal game state (normal mode) to the special game state (open / close execution mode). Immediately after switching to the open / close execution mode (timing of the opening display), the fanning operation by the movable effect device 49 (shutter 49a) is started.

After that, the upper variable winning device 330X (upper large winning opening 331X) is opened at the timing of te8, and the lower variable winning device 380X (lower large winning opening 381X) is opened at the timing of te9. The shutter 49a closes at the timing of te10 when the opening and closing operations of the variable winning devices 330X and 380X are completed, and the display screen 41a is temporarily invisible. Then, when the shutter 49a is released at the timing of te11 immediately after that, the stage display displayed on the symbol display device 41 (display screen 41a) is changed. At the timing of the following te12, the open / close execution mode ends, and the normal game state is restored. Along with this, the symbol display device 41 starts the variable display of the symbol again.

With reference to FIG. 52, the difference between the game progress in the normal game state and the game progress (corresponding game times-open / close execution mode-next game times) when the open / close execution mode corresponding to the low frequency winning mode is sandwiched between them is supplemented. explain.

As shown in FIG. 52 (a), in the game times that are out of reach, when the variation display ends and the symbol combination corresponding to the game result is stopped and displayed, the symbol display device 41 (display screen 41a) displays. The confirmation display is continued for "1.2 sec". Then, after the final display time has elapsed, the variable display of the symbol related to the next game round is started. That is, the time when the symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen 41a coincides with the confirmed display time.

On the other hand, regarding the flow of the game when the special result is obtained, the appearance is almost the same as the example shown in FIG. 52 (a), although the game state is changed internally. Specifically, when the variable display ends at the corresponding game times and the symbol combination corresponding to the special result is stopped and displayed, the final display is set to "0.2 sec" on the symbol display device 41 (display screen 41a). It will continue for a long time. Then, when the confirmed display time has elapsed, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the open / close execution mode triggered by the special result, the stop display of the symbol combination is continued from the opening display maintaining the form to the open / close operation of the variable winning unit 32X. Since the opening display time = "0.2 sec" and the opening / closing operation time = "0.1 sec" x 2 + "0.3 sec" x 2, the stop display is displayed for "1.0 sec" in the open / close execution mode. The total stop display time, which is continued and combined with the confirmed display time "0.2 sec", is "1.2 sec", which is the same as the confirmed display time shown in FIG. 52 (a). As a result, it is avoided that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the result as the confirmation display time is shortened.

When shifting to the ending display, the shutter 49a is closed and the display screen 41a is temporarily shielded as described above, and the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed becomes invisible. Then, when the shutter 49a returns to the open position (standby position), the display screen 41a becomes visible again. At this point, the switching of the background image of the display screen 41a is completed, and the player is instructed that the gaming state may have changed.

According to the fifth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Even when shifting to the open / close execution mode, if it is the open / close execution mode corresponding to the low frequency winning mode, it is possible to obtain a substantial ball output even if the variable winning unit 32X opens and closes. Very low sex. Therefore, for a player who has expected an open / close execution mode corresponding to a high-frequency winning mode, even if the open / close execution mode is changed, the desired privilege cannot be enjoyed, which may cause a decrease in the motivation for playing. Here, in the game times that trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the low frequency winning mode, such inconvenience occurs by shortening the stop display period and making the transition to the open / close execution mode less noticeable. Can be suitably suppressed.

In the first place, there are three measures to prevent the player's attention from being directed to the variable ball entry portion. That is, (1) it is difficult to understand that the transition to the open / close execution mode has been confirmed, (2) it is difficult to understand that the transition to the open / close execution mode has been confirmed, and (3) the movement of the variable winning unit 32X can be understood. Make it difficult. In the countermeasure (1), the player may suffer a disadvantage of shortage because the player cannot grasp the game result, and in the countermeasure (3), the visibility of the variable winning device 32 is lowered, so that the frequency is high. The opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the winning mode becomes an obstacle when appealing the movement of the variable winning unit 32X. In other words, there is a limit to the measures (1) and (3) when consideration is given to the profit security of the player. In this regard, as shown in this feature, in the low-frequency winning mode in which the required time is set short, the display of the pattern stopped and displayed at the corresponding game times is continued. As a result, while clearly indicating the game result, it is possible to make it appear as if the player has not yet transitioned to the open / close execution mode, and it is difficult to grasp that the open / close execution mode has been entered.

As described above, when the opening / closing execution mode itself does not meet the expectations of the player, the opening / closing execution mode (particularly the movement of the variable winning unit 32X) is made as inconspicuous as possible while showing that a special result has been obtained. It is preferable to proceed in this way. As already explained, it is not preferable that the stop display time of the symbol combination is unnecessarily long because it causes discomfort to the player, but as long as it does not exceed the final display time in the game times other than the special result. , The combination of symbols displayed as stopped does not become an excessive appeal. Therefore, if the fixed display time of the game times related to the special result + the continuous display time of the symbol combination in the open / close execution mode = the fixed display time of the game times other than the special result, the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed and special. It is possible to preferably exert the function of distracting the attention of the variable ball entry portion under the gaming state.

In particular, in a configuration in which the reach display is always executed when the lottery result is a big hit result or a special loss result, the degree of attention to the reach display is higher than that in the case where the reach display is not performed. Therefore, the fixed display time of the game times related to the special result + the time of continuous display of the symbol combination in the open / close execution mode = the fixed display time of the game times other than the special result and the reach display is executed. As a result, it is possible to preferably improve the degree of attention to the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed from the flow of the series of games.

The continuous display of the symbol combination in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the low frequency winning mode is continued until the open / close execution mode ends. That is, the open / close execution mode ends, the game shifts to the normal game state, and the next game round continues until the start. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it appear as if the open / close execution mode corresponding to the low frequency winning mode is the same as the interval between game times. In the open / close execution mode, it is easy to pay attention to the variable winning unit 32X (its movement), but by daring to mimic the open / close execution mode as if it were part of the normal gaming state, the open / close execution corresponding to the low frequency winning mode is executed. It can be suitably suppressed that the existence of the mode causes discomfort to the player.

When the continuous display of the symbol combination in the open / close execution mode is performed, the continuous display is performed while maintaining the display form of the symbol combination stopped and displayed in the corresponding game times that triggered the transition. Thereby, the above-mentioned mimicry effect can be more preferably exhibited.

In this embodiment, in particular, the time required for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the low-frequency winning mode has been shortened so as to be substantially equal to the interval period between game times. As a result, the various effects described above can be suitably exhibited. In order to shorten the time required for the opening / closing execution mode, the variable winning unit 32X also has the variable winning devices 330X and 380X, and these variable winning devices 330X and 380X are configured to open and close alternately, thereby closing → opening. → The closing interval period can be reduced favorably. For the variable winning device, it is necessary to secure the operation period, the discharging period of the winning game ball, and the like, and the opening / closing execution mode is extended by the collateral of these periods. The above configuration has a technical significance that the time can be shortened suitably, and the configuration is such that the stop display period in the game round that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the low frequency winning mode is shortened. Coupled with this, it is possible to preferably suppress the transition to the opening / closing execution mode from being excessively conspicuous.

<Other embodiments>
The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. By the way, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or may be applied in part or in combination.

(1) In a game machine that performs a reach effect using a character image, a movable accessory, or the like, the time required to return to the state in which the reach effect is not performed may differ depending on the mode of the reach effect or the like. In particular, in a gaming machine provided with a plurality of reach effects as shown in the first embodiment, when the fixed display time is fixed according to the relatively long time required for return, If the time required for recovery is relatively short, the confirmation display time will be unnecessarily long. On the other hand, when the fixed display time is fixed according to the relatively short time required for recovery, the fixed display time is not sufficient for the relatively long time required for recovery and the recovery is smooth. Will not be done. In view of such circumstances, when the fixed display time is used as the time required for the return, a practically preferable configuration is obtained by setting the fixed display time individually according to the type of reach display to be executed. realizable.

(2) In the first embodiment described above, the fixed display time is shortened to be shorter than the fixed display time in the normal gaming state in the high-probability gaming state in which the high-frequency support mode and the high-probability mode are set. However, it is not limited to this. At least, it is sufficient that the confirmation display time is shortened in a state where the speed of the pending digestion is set to be faster than usual. For example, it is possible to shorten the fixed display time in the gaming state in which the high-frequency support mode and the low-probability mode are set so that the probability of entering the operating port 33b is high.

(3) In the second or third embodiment, the fixed display time is changed when a predetermined advance notice effect (type 2 advance notice effect) is executed, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 29, it is possible to configure the fixed display time to become shorter as the variable display time becomes shorter. As a result, the so-called time saving function can be further strengthened.

It is not necessary to add such a function to all of the various gaming states. Considering that the number of holds is likely to be secured in the high probability gaming state, for example, the above variable function is exhibited in the normal gaming state, while the fixed display time is set to a specific time (minimum / lower limit) in the high probability gaming state. The configuration may be fixed.

(4) In the third embodiment, the display start timing of the image for holding notice is set to the elapse of 0.8 sec, which is the lower limit of the fixed display time, but 1.0 sec, which is the reference variable display time. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the display of the hold notice image is started as a result of the progress.

(5) In the above embodiment, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, and super reach B are provided as reach effects, and these various reach effects are used in combination in both the normal game state and the high probability game state. However, Super Reach C may be provided as a reach effect dedicated to the high-probability gaming state. For Super Reach C (for example, a reach effect in which a big hit is confirmed when it occurs), if the reach effect is performed by displaying a character image in the same manner as Super Reach A and Super Reach B, Super Reach By enlarging the size of the character image and the occupied area of the character image as compared with A and B, the impact when Super Reach C occurs can be strengthened. When such an effect is performed, by securing a long time required for displaying the end of the reach effect, it is possible to preferably secure the time required for saving the character image described above, and the afterglow of winning the jackpot. A configuration that is easy to leave is realized. Thereby, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably improved.

(6) In the first embodiment described above, the characterk image for reach effect is saved by using the fixed display time, but such a technical idea can be applied to the following configuration. Is. For example, when a reach effect is performed using an effect mechanism (movable accessory) having an effect unit (for example, decoration) that can be displaced between the standby position and the effect position, the effect unit is made to stand by from the effect position by using the fixed display time. It is also possible to configure it to return to the position.

(7) In the third embodiment described above, the display of the preview image causes a time during which the symbol being displayed for confirmation becomes invisible, but the symbol can be visually recognized at least during the confirmation display time. As long as a certain amount of time is included, how long the above-mentioned preview image is displayed may be arbitrarily changed.

(8) In the third embodiment described above, the notice image is displayed so that the symbol located behind the notice image is not visible, but the notice image is displayed. It is also possible to ensure the visibility of the design even under such circumstances. For example, the notice image may be provided with transparency so that the symbol located behind the notice image can be visually recognized, or the notice image may be displayed behind the symbol. Alternatively, the rehearsal image may be displayed in an area outside the display area of the symbol.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, when both the time shortening function (time variable function) related to the above-mentioned variable display time and the time shortening function (time variable function) related to the confirmed display time are exhibited, The rate of shortening of the variable display time (rate of change) is set to be larger than the rate of shortening of the fixed display time (rate of change). Further, the shortening rate (change rate) of the game time (variable display time + fixed display time) related to one game round is configured to be larger than the shortening rate (change rate) of the fixed display time. How to set the shortening rate (change rate) is arbitrary, but if the variable display time is just the process of notifying the game result and the original notification function of the fixed display time is to be secured, It is preferable to suppress an extreme change in the fixed display time in the entire game and secure the notification function.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the lower limit of the fixed display time is set to "0.8 sec" and the upper limit is set to "1.2" sec so as to prevent the amount of change from becoming excessively large. May be changed arbitrarily.

(11) In the above embodiment, the game time related to one game is composed of the variable display time and the fixed display time, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the fixed display time is the interval between the game times, it is also possible to set the game time related to one game time = the variable display time.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the number of prize balls (“1”) based on the entry into the second entry section 33e is the number of prize balls (“3”) based on the entry into the first entry section 33d. ), But is not limited to this. It is also possible to set the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second entry section 33e to be the same as or greater than the number of prize balls based on entry into the first entry section 33d.

However, as already described, in setting the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second entry section 33e shown in the above embodiment to "1", the game progress is accelerated and the normal game state is set. In emphasizing the difference between the game and the high-probability game state, it has a close relationship with the shortening of the variable display time and the like. If the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second entry unit 33e is set to "2", "3", ..., Many prize balls can be given to the player. For this reason, if you try to suppress the granting of excessive benefits, you can devise a way to reduce the ball entry rate (acquisition rate of hold information), or reduce the amount of shortening of the variable display time and fixed display time. It is expected that it will be necessary to take measures such as doing so. This is a factor that hinders the speeding up of the progress of the game. Therefore, it is desirable that the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second entry section 33e is set to "1" so that the increase in the number of game balls in the highly accurate gaming state can be suppressed.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, by devising the structure of the actuating port unit 33, the game ball that has entered the upper actuating opening 33a can be placed in either the first entry portion 33d or the second entry portion 33e. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the lower operating port 33b is configured to enter only the second entry portion 33e, but this may be changed as follows. Specifically, even if the lower operating port 33b and the electric accessory 34 associated therewith are provided separately from the upper operating port 33a, and a configuration corresponding to the second ball entry portion 33e is added to the lower operating port 33b. Good. That is, the game ball that has entered the upper operating port 33a can enter either the first entry portion 33d or the second entry portion 33e, while the game ball that has entered the lower operating opening 33b is separately provided. It may be configured to enter the second ball entry portion. In such a configuration, the number of prize balls when the ball enters the first ball entry unit 33d or the second ball entry unit 33e through the upper operating port 33a is set to "3", and the added second ball entry unit is added. It is also possible to set the number of prize balls to "1" when a ball enters through the lower operating port 33b.

(14) In the above embodiment, in the notification / effect control device 82 and the display control device 212, the effect related to the game round such as the variation display of the symbol is performed based on the reception of the variation command from the main control device 81. It is configured to start and end the effect related to the game round based on the reception of the variable end command (confirmation command) from the main control device 81, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It is also possible to omit the variable end command. For example, the notification / effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 may independently determine the end timing of the effect based on the information such as the time included in the variation command.

However, in such a configuration, the timing at which the symbol variation display or the like on the symbol display device 41 ends may deviate from the end timing of the variation display on the main display unit 43 due to a malfunction of the control devices 82, 212 or the like. In particular, when the end timing of the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is delayed, the shift is not performed well even though the display should be shifted to the display corresponding to the next game round or the like. The smooth progress of the game can be hindered. Therefore, when omitting the variation end command, the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 41 is forced based on the reception of commands related to the game progress such as the variation pattern command, the opening command, and the shift command. It may be configured to end in (a configuration for confirming display). When such a forced termination occurs, the delay from the progress of the game can be quickly recovered by configuring the above-mentioned fixed display time to be shorter than the normal fixed display time. For example, when the first confirmed display time and the second confirmed display time shorter than the first confirmed display time are set as the confirmed display time, the second confirmed display time is selected under the above circumstances. It may be configured.

(15) In the game times related to the lottery result (for example, winning result) corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode (corresponding to the "special game state"), the fixed display time (for example, 0.2 sec) is relatively short as the fixed display time. ) Is set, and a relatively long fixed display time (for example, 1.0 sec) is set as the fixed display time in the game times related to the lottery result (for example, the out-of-order result) that does not correspond to the transition to the open / close execution mode. May be good. Regarding the above-mentioned hit results, for example, the above-mentioned jackpot results (win results corresponding to the high-frequency winning mode) and the opening / closing execution mode are shifted, but the opening period of the variable winning device 32 does not actually generate or occurs. It may be at least one of the so-called small hit results (win results corresponding to the low frequency winning mode) set so as to be difficult.

(16) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the movable effect device 49 (shutter 49a) arranged on the front side of the symbol display device 41 (corresponding to the “design display means”) is a precursor to the stage shift. Although it is configured to perform the effect (fanning effect), it is not always necessary to perform the effect by a configuration other than the symbol display device 41. As shown in the first embodiment, for example, the symbol display device 41 may be configured to perform a precursory effect by displaying an image imitating a configuration corresponding to the movable effect device 49. .. It is also possible to apply the configuration corresponding to the movable effect device 49 to the first embodiment or the like.

(17) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, in the case of a special result (16R probability variation jackpot result A, 2R probability variation jackpot result, special deviation result), the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41 is displayed as a special symbol. Although the symbol combination including the "CHANGE" symbol is stopped and displayed, it is not necessary to include the above special symbol in the symbol combination corresponding to the special result. It is also possible to combine existing main symbols to form a symbol combination corresponding to a special result.

For example, it is possible to correspond the combination of the symbols when the "3" symbol, the "5" symbol, and the "7" symbol are stopped on the effective line to the special hit result and the special miss result. In such a configuration, it is not always necessary to stop and display the symbol combination through the reach display. In this case, it is shown in the fifth embodiment by matching the sum of the definite display time corresponding to the complete deviation result and the definite display time in the corresponding game times + the stop display time of the symbol combination in the open / close execution mode. It is possible to preferably embody the technical ideas.

In addition, when displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the special result in the corresponding game times and passing through the reach display, the final stop symbol is deviated by a predetermined number of frames from the other symbols forming the reach line. It is also possible to configure the symbol combination when the device is stopped to correspond to the special hit result and the special miss result.

(18) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, a difference is set in the final display time in the corresponding game times according to the result of the winning / losing lottery (big hit result and special loss result). Specifically, the confirmed display time when the 2R jackpot result, the 16R probability variation jackpot result A, and the special deviation result are obtained is shorter than the confirmation display time when the 16R probability variation jackpot result B and the 16R normal jackpot result are obtained. Set to. In the game round to shift to the open / close execution mode as the "special game state", setting the difference in the confirmed display time according to the type of the open / close execution mode is not limited to the above configuration, but is as follows. May be changed to. That is, it is set so that the confirmed display time when the 2R jackpot result, the 16R probability variation jackpot result A, and the special deviation result are obtained is longer than the confirmation display time when the 16R probability variation jackpot result B and the 16R normal jackpot result are obtained. You may. However, if the confirmation display time is shortened in a situation where the player should be appealed that the open / close execution mode has been entered, the appeal function may not work well. In addition, in a situation where it is not desirable to appeal that the open / close execution mode has been entered, the appeal function is unnecessarily enhanced by increasing the confirmation display time. In consideration of such circumstances, as shown in the fourth and fifth embodiments, the fixed display time in the case of the game result related to the high frequency winning mode is set to be relatively long, and the frequency is low. It is preferable to set the confirmation display time relatively short when the game result is related to the winning mode.

It is also possible to set a difference in the fixed display time according to the type of opening / closing execution mode (for example, advantage). When a plurality of types of special game states are set, it is suggested which type of special game state has been shifted to by setting a difference in the symbol combination displayed as a stop. However, after the player confirms the visual information related to the combination of symbols, even if the stop display (confirmed display) of the symbols is continued, it does not help to improve the attention of the player. Therefore, if the stop display period is changed according to the type of the open / close execution mode jackpot, the player's attention can be directed to the stop display period instead of the symbol itself displayed by the configuration. As a result, the degree of attention to the stopped-displayed symbol can be suitably improved.

For example, as an opening / closing execution mode (special game state), a first opening / closing execution mode (first special game state) and a second opening / closing execution mode (second special game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first opening / closing execution mode. When is set and the fixed display time (stop display period) is set to the first time and the second time longer than the first, the game times that trigger the transition to the first open / close execution mode. Then, the second time is more likely to be selected than the first time, and the first time may be more easily selected than the second time in the game round that triggers the transition to the second opening / closing execution mode. In such a configuration, the player expects that the stopped-displayed symbol is maintained in that state for as long as possible, and the degree of attention to the stopped-displayed symbol can be suitably improved. .. This is also a preferable configuration in order to prevent attention from the variable ball entry portion in the low frequency winning mode described above.

Incidentally, by continuing the stop display during the open / close execution mode so that the stop display time does not always match the fixed display time, the effect shown in the fifth embodiment can be further enhanced.

(19) In the fourth and fifth embodiments described above, the fixed display time in the game times in which the reach display is performed is set to be longer than the fixed display time in the game times that results in complete deviation. It is also possible to make both fixed display times common so that the presence or absence of reach display does not cause a difference in the fixed display time.

In addition, the fixed display time in the game times that is the game result corresponding to the high frequency winning mode is set to be longer than the fixed display time in the game times that is the normal out-of-game result, but both fixed display times are common. It is also possible to do.

(20) In the case of a big hit result or a special loss result, the configuration shifts to the special game state via the reach display, and the special display time is based on the final display time of the game times, which is the game result corresponding to the high frequency winning mode. Although the final display time of the resulting game times is set to be shorter than the standard, this standard may be changed as follows. When the reach display is performed, it is not always the case that the result is a big hit, but rather, in many cases, it is the result of deviation (usually the result of deviation). In consideration of such circumstances, the fixed display time when a special result is obtained should be set to be shorter than the confirmed display time when the result is normally out of reach after the reach display. Is also possible.

(21) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the symbol combination stopped and displayed in the corresponding game times is continuously displayed while maintaining the form even after the final display. Is optional. Further, it is not always necessary to configure the continuous display during the open / close execution mode. However, there is technical significance in performing the above-mentioned continuous display in order to make the difference between the normal game state → open / close execution mode → normal game state as little as possible from the case where the open / close execution mode is not passed. Furthermore, by suppressing the sum of the confirmed display time and the duration of the corresponding game time so as not to exceed the confirmed display time of the game time, which normally results in a deviation via the reach display, the continuous display is suppressed from becoming redundant. it can.

In addition, when the display of the symbol combination is continued after the final display, it is not always necessary to maintain the display form, and the display form may be changed (for example, reduced display is performed).

(22) In the fifth embodiment described above, the sum of the confirmation display time when the special hit result and the special deviation result are obtained and the time required for the opening / closing execution mode is the reach display → the confirmation display when the normal deviation occurs. It was configured to be longer than the time, but it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the sum of the confirmed display time when the special hit result and the special deviation result are obtained and the time required for the open / close execution mode is the same length (equivalent) as the confirmed display time when the reach display → normal deviation occurs. It may be configured as follows. However, since the opening / closing execution mode includes the operation of the variable winning unit 32X, it is necessary to secure the operation time and the like, and there is a limit to shortening the required time. Therefore, the configuration may be extended according to the sum of the confirmed display time when a special result is obtained and the time required for the opening / closing execution mode. In other words, as a result, the sum of the confirmed display time when a special result is obtained and the time required for the open / close execution mode is the same length (equivalent) as the confirmed display time when the reach display → normal deviation occurs. For example, the specific configuration is arbitrary, and may be realized not by shortening the time required for the open / close execution mode but by extending the definite display time when the normal deviation occurs after the reach display. However, if the confirmation display time in the case of reach display → normal deviation is extended, the game progress is unnecessarily delayed, which may be a factor that hinders smooth game progress. Therefore, it is desirable to reduce the time required for the opening / closing execution mode.

It should be noted that the sum of the confirmed display time when a special result is obtained and the required time in the open / close execution mode may be shorter than the confirmed display time related to the corresponding game times when shifting to the high-frequency winning mode. It is possible. That is, the time required for the open / close execution mode may be shorter than the difference in the confirmed display time.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the ending display is excluded from the time for continuing the stop display of the symbol combination, but the time for the ending display is included in the time for continuing the stop display. May be good. It is also possible to set the fixed display time related to the corresponding game times when shifting to the high-frequency winning mode = the time for the opening display + the time for the opening / closing operation + the time for the ending display.

By the way, the time when the symbol is stopped and displayed when the special result is obtained and the time when the symbol is stopped and displayed when the normal result is out of order may be the same length period, or the player is the same. It may be a length that can be recognized as a length. That is, in order to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned discomfort and suppress the conspicuous opening / closing execution mode related to the special result, the above periods are not completely matched, but a slight difference (identification is impossible or is not possible). The configuration may allow a difference) to the extent that it becomes difficult.

Further, it is also possible to configure the time for the symbol to be stopped and displayed when the special result is obtained to be less than the time for the symbol to be stopped and displayed when the result is out of the ordinary.

By shortening the fixed display period and supplementing it with continuous display in the open / close execution mode in the game times that have a special result, the original function (notification function) of the fixed display can be guaranteed. Then, although the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode after the confirmation display, the variable ball entry device 32 or the like is used while the player is waiting for the transition to the open / close execution mode (while waiting for the fake confirmation display to end). Can be operated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being directed to the variable ball entry device 32.

In particular, in the game times where the normal result is out of order, the stop display period of the symbol = the final display period, and in the case of a special result, the stop display period of the symbol is the sum of the final display period and the continuous display period (in the open / close execution mode). By the following, the frequency is low by reducing the time during which the player's attention is directed to the variable ball entry device 32, etc. in a series of flows in which the normal game state (corresponding game times) → open / close execution mode → normal game state. It is possible to preferably suppress the movement of the variable ball entry device 32 or the like in the winning mode from being noticeable.

(23) In the fifth embodiment, in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the special result, the display form of the symbol combination stopped and displayed at the game time (corresponding game time) that triggered the display is displayed. Although the configuration is set to continue while maintaining it, the display mode in the open / close execution mode may be arbitrarily changed. For example, it may be configured to display a character or the like corresponding to the open / close execution mode.

In particular, the display of the symbol combination stopped and displayed in the corresponding game round is continued while maintaining the display form, and at least the above symbol combination is displayed for the same time as the confirmed display time when the reach display → normal deviation occurs. By displaying, it is possible to guarantee the visibility of the stop result and to incorporate the open / close execution mode in between while keeping the flow of the game uninterrupted. However, if the former of these two functions is focused on, it is not necessary to continue on the premise of matching. If the latter is emphasized, it is sufficient to continue the symbol display in a visible state even during the ending, and the reach display → the confirmed display time when the normal deviation occurs = the special hit result and the special deviation result. By setting the fixed display time + the time required for the open / close execution mode, it is possible to contribute to further improvement of the effect.

(24) As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 53, a configuration in which the same effect as the stage transition via the open / close execution mode (ending display) is performed at the beginning (for example, at the start) of the game round corresponding to the out-of-normal result. If it is adopted, the time difference (mismatch) due to the ending display can be preferably avoided. That is, even when the transition to the high probability mode is not determined internally, a practically preferable configuration is realized by configuring the stage transition as a so-called fake effect.

(25) In the fifth embodiment, the variable winning devices 330X and 380X are maintained in a closed state by alternately opening and closing a plurality of large winning openings, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the opening of the large winning opening of 1 is repeated as in the fourth embodiment. However, in order to shorten the time required for discharging the inflowing game ball from the variable winning device, detecting the game ball, etc., and shortening the time required for the opening / closing execution mode, the width of the large winning opening is reduced, etc. It is advisable to devise.

However, in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the high-frequency winning mode, the opening of the large winning opening itself can be a factor that enhances the player's motivation to play. Therefore, as described above, miniaturization of the variable winning device (large winning opening) may hinder the improvement of the degree of attention to the game. In order to reduce the time required for the variable winning device 1 in consideration of such circumstances, a plurality of detection points for the inflowing game ball should be provided side by side (for example, the bottom surface of the inflow passage should be inclined from the center to the left and right). It is preferable to provide detection sensors on both the left and right sides).

(26) The fanning effect (precursor effect) by the movable effect device 49 may be executed so as to overlap at least the operation period during which the variable winning device 32 operates. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress the player's attention from being directed to the variable ball entry portion.

(27) In the fifth embodiment, the width of the upper prize opening 331 is larger than the width of the lower prize opening 381, but the width of the upper prize opening 331 and the width of the lower prize opening 381. May be the same, or the width of the upper prize opening 331 may be smaller than the width of the lower prize opening 381.

However, the increase in size of the large winning opening 381X, which is the object of shielding by the decorative body 48X, may be a factor that strengthens the restrictions on the size and shape of the decorative body 48X in order to secure the shielding function. Therefore, preferably, as shown in the above embodiment, the large winning opening 381X (variable winning device 380X) to be shielded is made smaller than the large winning opening 331X (variable winning device 330X) not to be shielded. Is preferable.

(28) In the fifth embodiment, the upper opening / closing door 332X (corresponding to the "first movable body") of the upper variable winning device 330X and the lower opening / closing door 382X ("second movable") of the lower variable winning device 380X. Regarding (corresponding to "body"), the protrusion to the game area PE is suppressed in the blocked state, and the protrusion to the game area PE in the allowable state, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the protrusion to the game area PE in the allowable state is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the protrusion of the door is suppressed and the door protrudes into the game area PE in the blocked state.

Further, although the opening / closing doors 332X and 382X are of the rotary type, they can also be of the slide type. In this case, it is difficult to visually capture the movement of the sliding shutter. Therefore, when the slide-type shutter and the rotary-type shutter are used in combination, it is preferable that the object to be shielded by the decorative body 48X is the rotary-type shutter.

(29) In the fifth embodiment, the two variable winning devices 330X and 380X are used in combination in any of the opening / closing execution modes, but the target is limited according to the type of opening / closing execution mode. It is also possible to do. For example, in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the high frequency winning mode, the variable winning devices 330X and 380X may be used together, while in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the low frequency winning mode, only the lower variable winning device 380X may be used. ..

The opening / closing order of the two variable winning devices 330X and 380X may be arbitrarily changed.

(30) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the symbol combination stopped and displayed at the corresponding game times during the open / close execution mode as the "special game state" (during the open / close execution mode related to the low frequency winning mode). The display of is continued, but the display is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the display so that the display is not continued in the open / close execution mode.

When shifting to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the relatively disadvantageous low-frequency winning mode, there is a possibility that the player's motivation to play may decrease even if the switching to the opening / closing execution mode does not meet the expectations of the player. .. For this reason, it may be better to direct the player's attention to the subsequent game progress instead of the corresponding game time. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the low-frequency winning mode, it is preferable that the stop display of the symbol combination is rounded up early so that the stopped display symbol combination causes discomfort to the player. Can be suppressed.

(31) In the above embodiment, the upper symbol row, the middle symbol row, and the lower symbol row are configured to be variablely displayed in the horizontal direction in the variable display area ME of the display screen 41a, but this is changed and the upper symbol is changed. , The middle symbol and the lower symbol may be switched and displayed in the individually set display area. That is, the symbols displayed in the display area may be sequentially replaced in ascending or descending order.

(32) In the above embodiment, the notification / effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 are separately provided, but one control device that integrates the functions of the respective control devices 82 and 212 may be provided.

(33) Another type of pachinko machine different from the above embodiment, for example, a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, which is a big hit when a right is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Further, a pachinko machine and a slot machine equipped with a take-in device, in which a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device and then the start lever is operated to start the rotation of the reel. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which and is fused.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

The following feature group is as follows: "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays a variable pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a gaming area. With the winning of the operating port as an opportunity, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player such as a winning state, and a variable display of the pattern is started. If the lottery is won, , A specific pattern combination or the like is stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1). Regarding the background technology, "Here, in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, the pattern There is still room for improvement in the display mode and the like. ”The invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Features 1. Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control unit 81) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232 provided in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers, and
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the given information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of the special information is stored. Grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process or the like in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for sequentially performing the grant determination for the special information,
The privilege granting means (main control) that grants the privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. (Function to execute the opening / closing process of the big winning opening in the MPU 202 of the device 81) and
A pattern display means (design display device 41) having a display unit (display screen 41a) and variably displaying a pattern on the display unit, and
The result of the grant determination is that the pattern display means starts variable display of the pattern prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means. The display control means (main control device 81, notification / effect control device 82, display control device 212) for controlling the display of the pattern display means so as to stop and display the stop result corresponding to the above is provided.
The display control means is characterized by having a stop display period variable means (a function of determining a fixed display time in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for changing the stop display period for performing the stop display. Machine.

According to the feature 1, the pattern is variably displayed on the display unit as the game progresses, and the combination of the patterns according to the result of the grant determination is stopped and displayed. In view of the basic configuration of such a game machine, it is assumed that the player's attention is exclusively directed to the variable display of the pattern such as the combination of the patterns finally specified and the reach display executed in the process. .. In recent years, by adopting a so-called time saving function that shortens the period during which variable display is executed and a variety of reach displays, the progress of the game is sharpened and the degree of attention to the game is improved.

Here, although various measures have been taken for the variable display (period) as described above, for the stop display period (specifically, the period for displaying the game result, the fixed period), grasp the result of the grant determination. This stop display period was uniform, merely prompting and functioning as a break to the next game.

The uniform stop display period in this way can hinder the function of avoiding the monotony of the game. In this regard, according to this feature, by changing the stop display period, for example, the rhythm of the game can be changed by giving a change such as slowness or speed to the progress of the game according to the game situation or the like. As a result, it is possible to more preferably suppress the monotonization of the game and contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, for example, "when the subsequent special information exists, the start of the variable display based on the subsequent special information is restricted during the stop display, and the stop display ends after the stop display period. If the above technical idea is applied to the configuration in which the variable display based on the subsequent special information is started based on the above, the interval can be varied in the configuration in which the stop display period functions as an interval. It is possible to make a suitable contribution to the rhythm change of the game progress.

Incidentally, as for the stop display period variable means for changing the stop display period for performing the stop display, it is sufficient if the stop display period can be changed as a result, and the timing for determining the stop display period is predetermined. The configuration may be such that the stop display period is fixed during the variable display or the stop display.

Feature 2. The display control means includes means for changing the variable display period for performing the variable display.
The stop display period variable means
When the variable display period becomes the first variable display period which is relatively long, the means for setting the first stop display period as the stop display period and
When the variable display period becomes the second variable display period, which is relatively short, the variable display period has a means for setting a second stop display period shorter than the first stop display period. The gaming machine according to the feature 1.

According to Feature 2, when the variable display period is relatively long, the stop display period is also relatively long, and when the variable display period is relatively short, the stop display period is also relatively short. By changing the stop display period by linking (harmonizing) with the variable display period in this way, for example, the above-mentioned slow / fast difference can be generated by utilizing the entire game times including the variable display period and the stop display period. It is possible to preferably exert the effect shown in the feature 1.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, for example, when it is desired to exert a so-called time saving function to accelerate the game progress, it is advantageous in suppressing the existence of the stop display period from being an obstacle.

Feature 3. As the gaming state, a plurality of gaming states having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided.
A game state transition means for shifting the game state to any of the plurality of game states as the game progresses is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature 1 or feature 2, wherein the stop display period variable means has means for setting the stop display period based on a gaming state.

According to the feature 3, not only the degree of advantage changes depending on the change in the game state, but also the stop display period changes according to the game state. By causing a difference in the flow of the game in this way, it is possible to more preferably suppress the monotonization of the game.

Feature 4. As the gaming state, a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which the granting determination is more likely to result in the granting response result than the first gaming state are provided.
The stop display period variable means sets the stop display period so that the stop display period in the second gaming state is shorter than the stop display period in the first gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature 3, wherein the gaming machine has a means for setting.

In a state that is advantageous to the player, that is, in the second gaming state in which the result of granting is likely to be obtained, the expectation for granting the privilege is higher than in the first gaming state. At this time, the delay in the advantageous situation can be a factor that gives the player the impression that the privilege grant is unnecessarily delayed. This hinders the player from maintaining expectations for the second gaming state (granting benefits). Therefore, in a situation where expectations for the granting of benefits have increased, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by shortening the stop display period and accelerating the progress of the game.

Feature 5. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A ball entry portion (lower operating port 33b) provided on the game board and capable of switching between a first state in which game balls flowing down the game area can flow in and a second state in which game balls are more difficult to flow in than in the receiving state. )When,
Switching control means for switching the ball entry unit to each of the first state and the second state when a preset switching condition is satisfied (a function of executing the electric service support process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81). With and
The information acquisition means is configured to acquire the special information based on the entry into the ball entry portion.
As the switching control mode of the ball entry portion by the switching control means, the player can switch between the first switching mode (for example, low frequency support mode) and the first state and the second state than the first switching mode. An advantageous second switching mode (for example, high frequency support mode) is set.
The stop display period variable means sets the stop display period so that the stop display period in the first switching mode is shorter than the stop display period in the second switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features 1 to 4, characterized in that it has a means for setting.

If there is an upper limit (specified number) for the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means as shown in feature 1, the existence of the upper limit makes it impossible to acquire special information. Can occur. Since the right to determine the grant cannot be obtained with such a ball, the waste becomes larger than that with a normal ball. Under these circumstances, there is a high possibility that the player will play the game while suppressing the investment (launch) of the game ball by so-called stop hitting. In this case, the effect of accelerating the game progress by the second switching mode is not exhibited well. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by shortening the stop display period in the second switching mode in which a large number of balls are likely to enter, the above-mentioned waste is suppressed and the player delays the progress of the game. Can contribute to suppression. Therefore, it is possible to preferably exert the effect of switching the mode and emphasizing the speed of the game progress.

In addition, when the "display control means" is in the "first switching mode", the variable display period for performing the variable display is set to be the first variable display period, and the second switching mode is set. In the case of the second variable display period, the variable display period for performing the variable display is set to be a second variable display period shorter than the first variable display period. " Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the acceleration function in the situation where the game progress is accelerated.

Incidentally, in the combination with the feature 2, "~, the means for changing the stop display period is the means for setting the stop display period in the case of the first switching mode as the first stop display period, and the first stop display period. 2 The gaming machine according to feature 2, characterized in that it has a means for setting the stop display period in the case of the switching mode as the second stop display period. " ..

Further, in combination with the feature 4 and the like, for example, the transition to the "first gaming state" results in the "first switching mode", and the transition to the "second gaming state" results in the "second switching mode". It is also possible to have a configuration that becomes.

Feature 6. The display control means sets the variable display period for performing the variable display to be the first variable display period when the first switching mode is set, and when the second switching mode is set, the display control means sets the variable display period to be the first variable display period. It has a means for setting the variable display period for performing the variable display to be the second variable display period shorter than the first variable display period.
Regardless of which of the first switching mode and the second switching mode is set, a specific display effect (for example, Super Reach B) is accompanied by the variable display based on the satisfaction of the predetermined effect condition. ) Is provided with a specific production execution means
The effect executing means is configured to display the end of the specific display effect by using the stop display period.
The stop display period variable means
When the first switching mode is set, a means for setting the first stop display period as the stop display period and
A means for setting a second stop display period shorter than the first stop display period as the variable display period when the second switching mode is set and the specific display effect is not executed.
A means for setting a third stop display period longer than the second stop display period as the stop display period when the second switching mode is set and the specific display effect is executed. The gaming machine according to feature 5, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by having.

As shown in feature 6, in the second switching mode in which ball entry is likely to occur, the variable display period is shorter than in the first switching mode to promote the digestion of special information, so that the game is played while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. Can proceed quickly. Here, by performing the end display of the specific display effect by using the stop display period, it is possible to reduce the time constraint related to the specific display effect.

In this feature, in particular, when a specific display effect is performed even in the second switching mode, the third stop display period is set instead of the second stop display period, and the shortening of the stop display period can be suppressed. It will be. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such that the period required for the end display of the specific display effect is insufficient and the end display is not smoothly performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a sense of discomfort in the display mode when the specific display effect ends (end display) due to the common use of the specific display effect.

It is also possible to make the length of the "third stop display period" and the length of the "first stop display period" shown in this feature the same.

Feature 7. The display control means sets the variable display period for performing the variable display to be the first variable display period when the first switching mode is set, and when the second switching mode is set, the display control means sets the variable display period to be the first variable display period. It has a means for setting the variable display period for performing the variable display to be the second variable display period shorter than the first variable display period.
Regardless of which of the first switching mode and the second switching mode is set, a specific display effect (for example, Super Reach B) is accompanied by the variable display based on the satisfaction of the predetermined effect condition. ) Is provided with a specific production execution means
The effect executing means is configured to display the end of the specific display effect by using the stop display period.
The stop display period variable means
When the first switching mode is set, a means for setting the first stop display period as the stop display period and
A means for setting a second stop display period shorter than the first stop display period as the variable display period when the second switching mode is set and the specific display effect is not executed.
It is characterized in that it has a means for setting the first stop display period as the stop display period when the second switching mode is set and the specific display effect is executed. The gaming machine according to the feature 5.

As shown in feature 7, in the second switching mode in which ball entry is likely to occur, the variable display period is shorter than in the first switching mode to promote the digestion of special information, so that the game is played while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. Can proceed quickly. Here, by performing the end display of the specific display effect by using the stop display period, it is possible to reduce the time constraint related to the specific display effect.

In this feature, in particular, when a specific display effect is performed even in the second switching mode, the first stop display period is set instead of the second stop display period, and shortening of the stop display period is avoided (regulation). Will be done. As a result, even in a configuration in which a common display effect is performed in both modes, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such that the period required for the end display of a specific display effect is insufficient and the end display is not smoothly performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a sense of discomfort in the display mode when the specific display effect ends (end display) due to the common use of the specific display effect.

Further, even if the stop display period is not shortened only when a specific display effect is performed, the specific display effect is not executed every game in the first place. Therefore, the acceleration effect of the game progress shown in the feature 5 and the like is not significantly reduced. Further, it is not necessary to store the mode of the end display for each mode in order to standardize the specific display effect, and it is possible to avoid unnecessarily increasing the storage capacity of the control device.

Features 8. The specific effect display has a start display that displaces the effect character to a predetermined effect position when the variable display is performed, and the end display that retracts the effect character from the predetermined effect position. Become
The period required for the end display is set to be the same as or shorter than the first stop display period.
The gaming machine according to feature 6 or feature 7, wherein the second stop display period is set to be shorter than the period required for the end display.

By setting the second stop display period to be shorter than the period required for the end display as shown in this feature, the function of accelerating the progress of the game by shortening the stop display period can be suitably exhibited. However, in such a configuration, it may be difficult to secure the period required for the end display on the premise that a specific effect display is shared in both modes.

If the production character (for example, a character image or a movable decoration part (role)) is forcibly moved to the next game while ignoring the completion of the end display, the production will be performed while the production character is being evacuated. It will be forcibly terminated and a visual discomfort may occur. For example, the forced termination can be avoided by shortening the period required for the end display by fast-forwarding or the like, but in such a measure, the evacuation speed changes significantly due to the influence of the shortening of the stop display period. Therefore, it is expected that it will be difficult to suppress the occurrence of visual discomfort. In addition, information for realizing such a special display mode becomes indispensable, and the storage area related to the effect may be compressed. Therefore, if the technical idea shown in the feature 6 or the feature 7 is applied to the configuration shown in the present feature, it is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of various inconveniences caused by emphasizing the slowness and speed of the game progress.

Features 9. When the second switching mode is set among the first switching mode and the second switching mode, a means for producing a second switching mode effect based on the establishment of a special condition is provided.
The stop display period variable means has means for setting a fourth stop display period longer than the first stop display period as the stop display period based on the establishment of the special condition in the second switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of feature 6 to feature 8, characterized in that it is used.

According to the feature 9, when the effect for the second switching mode is executed in the second switching mode (under the situation where the game progress is accelerated), the stop display period is changed from the second stop display period to the first stop display. By setting the fourth stop display period, which is longer than the first stop display period, instead of setting the period, the fluctuation range of the stop display period can be increased. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the game that has been progressing rapidly up to that point has been braked, and it is possible to contribute to the occurrence of slowness and speed as the game progresses.

For example, it is possible to adjust the speed by lengthening the variable display period, but by extending the stop display period, which has little change in the first place, it is possible to avoid weakening the impression of the occurrence of the speed. As a result, the above effect is preferably exhibited.

Features 10. The configuration is such that the second switching mode is switched to the first switching mode by assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the number of grant determinations executed in the second switching mode reaches a predetermined number.
The gaming machine according to feature 9, wherein the second switching mode effect is executed in a game time related to the special information that triggered the establishment of the predetermined condition.

As shown in feature 10, in the configuration in which the effect for the second switching mode is executed when the number of grant determinations reaches a predetermined number, the effect is switched to the first switching mode (falls) after the effect for the second switching mode. ). Here, when switching from the second switching mode to the first switching mode occurs, the stop display period is lengthened to produce a second switching mode effect (for example, a second switching mode end suggestion effect) during the stop display period. By performing the above, it is possible to suppress giving the player the impression that the mode is suddenly switched.

Features 11. The display control means includes means for changing the variable display period for performing the variable display.
The stop display period variable means
When the variable display period becomes the first variable display period which is relatively long, the means for setting the first stop display period as the stop display period and
When the variable display period becomes the second variable display period, which is relatively short, the variable display period has a means for setting a second stop display period shorter than the first stop display period. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature 1 to the feature 10.

According to Feature 2, when the variable display period is relatively long, the stop display period is also relatively long, and when the variable display period is relatively short, the stop display period is also relatively short. By changing the stop display period by linking (harmonizing) with the variable display period in this way, for example, the above-mentioned slow / fast difference can be generated by utilizing the entire game times including the variable display period and the stop display period. It is possible to preferably exert the effect shown in the feature 1.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, for example, when it is desired to exert a so-called time saving function to accelerate the game progress, it is advantageous in suppressing the existence of the stop display period from being an obstacle.

Features 12. The first stop display period and the second stop display period are more than the ratio of the sum of the first variable display period and the first stop display period to the sum of the second variable display period and the second stop display period. The gaming machine according to feature 11, characterized in that the ratio to and is small.

In the configuration shown in the feature 11, the slowness and speed can be further emphasized by making the second stop display period extremely short or making the first stop display period extremely long. However, when consideration is given to the original significance of the stop display period (clarification of the game result), the extreme difference in the stop display period hinders the successful exertion of the effect of providing the stop display period.

In this respect, the effect shown in the feature 11 can be suitably exhibited by guaranteeing the difference together with the variable display period instead of guaranteeing the difference by the stop display period alone. In particular, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by suppressing the contribution rate of the stop display period and avoiding an excessive change in causing such a difference. That is, when one game is configured by the variable display period and the stop display period, the stop display period becomes excessively short and it becomes difficult to confirm the result, or the stop display period is extended to attract the attention of the player. Clarify the difference between the game times consisting of the first variable display period and the first stop display period and the game times consisting of the second variable display period and the second stop display period while suppressing the decrease. Can be done.

Feature 13. The means for setting the first variable display period to be longer than the first stop display period, and the second variable display period to be the same as or from the first stop display period. When the means for setting the period to be short and the second variable display period are set by the means, the second stop display period is set to be shorter than the second variable display period. The gaming machine according to feature 11 or feature 12, characterized in that it has means to be set in.

According to feature 13, by setting the variable display period constituting one game time longer than the stop display period, the process until the result of hit or miss is clearly shown is shown to improve the interest of the player. By setting the first stop display period> the second variable display period> the second stop display period while ensuring the original function of the game machine, the game times consisting of the first variable display period and the first stop display period, The game times consisting of the second variable display period and the second stop display period can be differentiated for the entire game times.

Features 14. The information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the grant determination is before the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination. Equipped with a destination identification means to identify at the timing
When the result of the specific result by the first-specific means is a predetermined specific result, the period-variable means is performed before the game times related to the special information to be specified by the first-specific means. Any one of feature 1 to feature 13 characterized by having a special notification means for executing the special notification corresponding to the specific result of the destination specific means in the game round by changing the stop display period. The game machine described in one.

According to the feature 14, the stop display period goes beyond the function as a mere interval period, and the function of suggesting the subsequent game progress is exhibited. As a result, the degree of attention of the player during the stop display period can be suitably improved.

For example, when a first stop display period and a second stop display period shorter than the first stop display period are provided as the stop display period, the first stop display period and the second stop display are displayed if the specified result is predetermined. If the former is likely to be selected among the periods and the specific result is not a predetermined result, the latter may be easily selected from the first stop display period and the second stop display period.

Feature 15. A pattern display means (design display device 41) having a display unit (display screen 41a) and variably displaying a pattern on the display unit, and
A display control means (main control device 81, notification / effect control device 82) that controls the display of the pattern display means so that the pattern is stopped and displayed according to the game result after the pattern is variably displayed on the display unit. ， Display control device 212)
The display control means is provided with a period variable means ((a function of determining a fixed display time by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for changing the stop display period for performing the stop display). Machine.

According to the feature 15, the pattern is variably displayed → stopped displayed on the display unit as the game progresses. In view of the basic configuration of such a game machine, it is assumed that the player's attention is exclusively directed to the variable display of the pattern to be finally specified and the pattern such as the reach display executed in the process. In recent years, by adopting a so-called time saving function that shortens the period during which variable display is executed and a variety of reach displays, the progress of the game is sharpened and the degree of attention to the game is improved.

Here, although various measures have been taken for the variable display (period) as described above, for the stop display period (specifically, the period for displaying the game result, the fixed period), grasp the result of the grant determination. This stop display period was uniform, merely prompting and functioning as a break to the next game.

The uniform stop display period in this way can hinder the function of avoiding the monotony of the game. In this regard, according to this feature, by changing the stop display period, for example, the rhythm of the game can be changed by giving a change such as slowness or speed to the progress of the game according to the game situation or the like. As a result, it is possible to more preferably suppress the monotonization of the game and contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

In consideration of the technical idea shown in this feature, "a pattern display means (design display device 41) having a display unit (display screen 41a) and variably displaying a pattern on the display unit, and the display. With display control means (main control device 81, notification / effect control device 82, display control device 212) that controls the display of the picture display means so that the picture is stopped and displayed after the picture is variably displayed in the unit. The display control means is provided with a period variable means (a function of determining a fixed display time by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for changing the stop display period for performing the stop display. It is also possible to say "a game machine to play."

It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in features 2 to 14 to this feature.

Incidentally, for the "period variable means" shown in features 1 to 15, it is sufficient if the "stop display period" and the "stop display period" are changed according to the game situation, for example, a plurality of stops having different lengths. It is also possible to use it as a means for selecting / setting a stop display period of 1 from the display period.

Features 16. The privilege granting means changes the gaming state from the normal gaming state based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being the granting response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. It has a game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) to shift to the special game state.
As the special gaming state, a plurality of types of special gaming states having different degrees of advantage are set.
The stop display period variable means has a means for changing the stop display period of the game times that triggers the transition to the special game state according to the type of the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features 15.

As the game progresses, the pattern is variably displayed on the display unit, and the pattern corresponding to the result of the grant determination is stopped and displayed. According to this feature, by changing the stop display period, for example, the rhythm of the game can be changed by giving a change such as slowness or speed to the progress of the game according to the game situation or the like. As a result, it is possible to more preferably suppress the monotonization of the game and contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is that "the privilege granting means has become the granting result that the granting determination result by the granting determination means corresponds to the granting information of the special information to be determined. Based on this, it has a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that shifts the game state to the special game state, and the special game states include the first special game state and the first special game state. Two special gaming states are provided, and as the stop display period, a first stop display period and a second stop display period are provided, and the stop display period variable means shifts to the first special game state. In the game times that trigger the transition to the second special game state, the game is the means for setting the first stop display period as the stop display period related to the game times, and the game times that triggers the transition to the second special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features 1 to 15, characterized in that it has a means for setting the second stop display period as the stop display period related to the times. " Is.

Features 17. The privilege granting means changes the gaming state from the normal gaming state based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being the granting response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. It has a game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) to shift to the special game state.
A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A variable ball entry unit (variable winning device 32) provided in the game area and capable of switching to a first state and a second state in which ball entry is more difficult or impossible than the first state.
With a switching control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for switching the variable ball entry unit between the first state and the second state when the state shifts to the special gaming state. ,
With
A first switching mode and a second switching mode are set as modes of the switching control by the switching control means.
The stop display period variable means
A means for setting the first stop display period as the stop display period in the game times that triggers the transition to the first special game state corresponding to the first switching mode, and
A means for setting a second stop display period having a length different from the first stop display period as the stop display period in the game times that triggers the transition to the second special gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of feature 1 to feature 15, characterized in that it has.

As the game progresses, the pattern is variably displayed on the display unit, and the pattern corresponding to the result of the grant determination is stopped and displayed. According to this feature, by changing the stop display period, for example, the rhythm of the game can be changed by giving a change such as slowness or speed to the progress of the game according to the game situation or the like. As a result, it is possible to more preferably suppress the monotonization of the game and contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

The technical ideas shown in the features 16 and 17 can also be applied as follows. When multiple types of switching control modes (special game states) by the switching control means are set, it is suggested which type of special game state has been shifted to by setting a difference in the pattern combination displayed as a stop. There is something that is done. However, after the player confirms the visual information related to the pattern combination, even if the stop display (confirmed display) of the pattern is continued, it does not help to improve the attention of the player. Therefore, if the stop display period is changed according to the type of the special game state, the player's attention can be directed to, for example, the stop display period instead of the displayed pattern itself. Thereby, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably improved.

Incidentally, in the feature 16 or the feature 17, "the display control means starts the variable display of the pattern in the display unit, displays the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means, and ends the variable display of the pattern. This may be set as one game time, and the display control may be performed so that the pattern of each game time is variably displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.

Features 18. The first switching mode is set so that the period from the second state to the return to the second state through the first state is relatively short.
The second switching mode is set so that the period from the second state to the return to the second state through the first state is relatively long.
The gaming machine according to feature 17, wherein the first stop display period is set to be shorter than the second stop display period.

In the case of a relatively advantageous special gaming state (second special gaming state), it is a good opportunity to raise the degree of attention to the game. Therefore, in the corresponding game times that trigger the transition to the second special game state, the attractiveness of the game can be suitably appealed by lengthening the stop display period. On the other hand, in the case of a relatively disadvantageous special gaming state (first special gaming state), there is a possibility that the player's motivation to play may decrease because the player's expectations are not met even if the transition to the special gaming state is made. For this reason, it may be better to direct the player's attention to the subsequent game progress instead of the corresponding game time. Therefore, in the game times that triggered the transition to the first special game state, the design is stopped and displayed by configuring the game to shift to the first special game state as soon as possible instead of unnecessarily extending the corresponding game times. It is possible to preferably suppress a factor that unnecessarily agitates the discomfort of the player.

In addition, when the technical idea shown in this feature is applied to feature 15, "as the special game state, the first special game state and the second special game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state" The stop display period variable means sets the first stop display period as the stop display period in the game times that triggers the transition to the first special game state, and the second special game state. 5. The feature 15 is characterized in that it has a means for setting a second stop display period longer than the first stop display period as the stop display period in the game times that triggers the transition to the game state. It is also possible to say "a game machine."

Features 19. Display continuation means (notification / effect control device) for continuing the display of the pattern stopped and displayed at the game time that triggers the transition to the first special game state so as to straddle the game time and the first special game state. The gaming machine according to feature 18, wherein the display continuation function in the MPU 242 of 82) is provided.

In the first place, in order to stop and display the pattern at the end of the game round, there is a technical significance that the game result (the result of the above-mentioned grant determination) is visually taught to the player. For this reason, if the stop display period is extremely shortened for reasons such as not being the best result for the player as shown in feature 18, the above-mentioned prerequisite functions will not work well, and the player will be confused. There is a possibility that it will end up. Therefore, when the first special game state is reached, the occurrence of oversight or the like can be suitably suppressed by continuously displaying the stopped pattern so as to straddle the special game state. Further, in the first special gaming state, it may not be preferable that the player's attention is directed to the variable ball entry portion. Considering that the player's attention tends to be directed to the pattern, by intentionally continuing the display of the pattern so as to straddle the special gaming state, the player's attention can be changed in the situation of the special gaming state. It is possible to preferably suppress the orientation toward the ball portion.

Feature 20. The display continuation means continues the display until at least a period of the same length as the second stop period elapses after the pattern is stopped and displayed at the game times that triggered the transition to the first special game state. The gaming machine according to feature 19, wherein the gaming machine has a means for performing the game.

When the first special gaming state itself does not meet the expectations of the player, the first special gaming state (particularly the movement of the variable ball entry portion) is set while indicating that the first special gaming state has been reached. It is preferable to proceed as inconspicuously as possible. As already explained, it is not preferable that the stop display period is unnecessarily long because it causes discomfort to the player. However, as long as the second stop display period is not exceeded, the stop display pattern is displayed. It does not become an excessive appeal. Therefore, if the stop display period + the continuous display period = the second stop display period, the function of distracting the attention of the variable ball entry portion under the special gaming state can be suitably exhibited while suppressing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience. Can be done.

In the second special game state, the ball may enter the variable ball entry section, while in the first special game state, the ball may enter the variable ball entry section. , By applying the technical idea shown in this feature, a practically preferable configuration is realized.

Feature 21. The stop display period variable means serves as a stop display period when the pattern corresponding to the result is stopped and displayed through reach display in a game in which the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is not the result of the grant correspondence. It has a means to set the third stop display period,
The first stop display period is set to be shorter than the third stop display period.
The display continuation means continues the display until a period having the same length as the third stop period elapses after the pattern is stopped and displayed at the game times that triggered the transition to the first special game state. The gaming machine according to feature 19, wherein the gaming machine is configured as described above.

In a gaming machine of the type in which the reach display is performed in the process of showing the grant determination result, in many cases, the disengagement result is taught via the reach display. In other words, just because the reach display is performed does not necessarily result in the grant determination result, but rather in many cases, the result is out of order. In consideration of such circumstances, the period for stopping and displaying the pattern from the corresponding game times to the special game state is set to match the reach display → the stop display period (third stop display period) when the result is off. As a result, even if the grant determination result is actually given and the player is instructed to do so, it is possible to approach the flow of the game at the time of disengagement, and it is possible to make the occurrence of the special game state less noticeable.

Feature 22. The display continuation means is configured to continue the display from the stop display of the pattern at the game time that triggered the transition to the first special game state until the transition to the next game time. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature 19 to the feature 21.

According to the configuration shown in the feature 22, the first special gaming state can be made to appear as if it is the same as the interval between the gaming times. In the special game state, it is easy to pay attention to the variable ball entry part (its movement), but by daring to mimic the special game state as if it were a part of the normal game state, the existence of the first special game state is the game. It is possible to preferably suppress a factor that causes discomfort to the person.

Feature 23. The display continuation means is configured to continue the display of the symbol combination while maintaining the display form of the symbol combination stopped and displayed in the game round that triggers the transition. The gaming machine according to any one of the features 22.

In the configuration where it is preferable to pay attention to the special gaming state at the time of transition to the special gaming state and there are cases where it is not, the display form of the pattern combination that was intentionally stopped and displayed in the latter case was maintained. By continuing as it is, it is possible to prevent the special gaming state from becoming excessively conspicuous with the transition from the normal gaming state to the special gaming state to the normal gaming state.

Feature 24. When the state shifts to the first special gaming state through the stop display, the switching of the variable ball entry portion by the switching control means is completed while the display of the pattern is continued by the display continuing means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature 19 to the feature 23, which is configured as described above.

According to the feature 24, by operating the variable ball entry unit while the display of the pattern is being continued (in a situation where it seems that the game has not yet transitioned to the special gaming state), that is, the player's attention is paid to the pattern (the pattern () By operating the variable ball entry section in a situation where it is easy to face the pattern display means), it is possible to make the movement of the variable ball entry section less noticeable and prevent the player from paying attention to the variable ball entry section.

Feature 25. When the state shifts to the first special gaming state through the stop display, the variable ball entry portion is switched between the start of the stop display and the elapse of a period having the same length as the second stop display period. The gaming machine according to any one of features 17 to 24, which is configured to complete.

According to the feature 25, since the operation is performed by utilizing the gap between the first stop display period and the second stop display period, even when the transition from the normal gaming state to the special gaming state to the normal gaming state is performed, it is special. It is possible to prevent the existence of the gaming state from becoming a factor that unnecessarily delays the progress of the gaming.

Feature 26. As the normal game state, a first normal game state and a second normal game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state are set.
A means for setting the gaming state to the first normal gaming state through the first special gaming state, and
A means for setting the gaming state to the second normal gaming state through the first special gaming state, and
It has a suggestion means for suggesting whether the gaming state is the first normal gaming state or the second normal gaming state.
The suggestion means
In the first special game state, the first suggestion means for giving the suggestion until the continuous display of the pattern by the display continuation means ends and the first special game state ends.
The gaming machine according to any one of features 19 to 25, characterized in that it has a second suggestion means for making the suggestion when the game round is started.

According to feature 26, the normal gaming state can change via the first special gaming state. Here, by suggesting the normal gaming state after that during the first special gaming state, it is possible to encourage the player's attention to be directed to the suggestion, and the player's attention is directed to the variable entry portion. Can be suppressed.

In particular, when trying to make the transition to the first special gaming state less noticeable, it is necessary to resemble how the period of the first special gaming state is the interval between the game times in the normal gaming state. However, if the above suggestion is made even at the beginning of the normal game round, it is possible to suppress the break between the end of the first special game state and the start of the game round in the normal game state.

Feature 27. The first switching mode is set so that the period from the second state to the return to the second state through the first state is relatively short.
The second switching mode is set so that the period from the second state to the return to the second state through the first state is relatively long.
The gaming machine according to feature 17, wherein the first stop display period is set to be longer than the second stop display period.

When a difference between advantages and disadvantages is set for the special game state, it is relative in the corresponding game times that triggers the transition to the special game state (first special game state) corresponding to the first switching mode, which is relatively disadvantageous. The stop display period is longer than the corresponding game times that trigger the transition to the special game state (second special game state) corresponding to the second switching mode, which is particularly advantageous. In recent years, a game machine in which a so-called pseudo-ream or re-variation effect is performed on the display unit of the pattern display means has become widespread, and when such an effect is executed, the variable display of the pattern is being played. It will be temporarily stopped. Therefore, by setting a long stop display period on the disadvantageous side, it is possible to preferably arouse the expectation that the stop may be temporarily stopped (may develop) before such an effect is performed. In other words, even if the result is not actually what the player wants, it is possible to prevent a rapid decline in interest in the game by leaving a feeling of expectation that this may not be the end.

Feature 28. Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control unit 81) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232 provided in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers, and
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the given information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of the special information is stored. Grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process or the like in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for sequentially performing the grant determination for the special information,
The privilege granting means (main control) that grants the privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. (Function to execute the opening / closing process of the big winning opening in the MPU 202 of the device 81) and
A pattern display means (design display device 41) having a display unit (display screen 41a) and variably displaying a pattern on the display unit, and
The result of the grant determination is that the pattern display means starts variable display of the pattern prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means. The stop result corresponding to the above is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game, and the variable display of the pattern of each game is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is provided with a game time control means for controlling the pattern display means so as to be performed.
The privilege granting means changes the gaming state to the special gaming state based on the fact that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. It has a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) to be transferred.
A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A variable ball entry unit (variable winning device 32) provided in the game area and capable of switching to a first state and a second state in which ball entry is more difficult or impossible than the first state.
With a switching control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for switching the variable ball entry unit between the first state and the second state when the state shifts to the special gaming state. ,
With
A first switching mode and a second switching mode are set as modes of the switching control by the switching control means.
The game turn control means has a stop display period variable means (a function of determining a fixed display time by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for changing the stop display period for performing the stop display.
The stop display period variable means
A means for setting the first stop display period as the stop display period in the game times that triggers the transition to the first special game state corresponding to the first switching mode, and
It has a means for setting the second stop display period as the stop display period in the game times that triggers the transition to the second special game state corresponding to the second switching mode.
In the first special game state, a display continuation means for continuing the display of the pattern stopped and displayed at the game times that triggered the transition to the first special game state is provided.
The final display period of the game result in the game times that triggered the transition to the second special game state becomes the second stop period.
The sum of the first stop display period, which is the fixed display period of the game result in the game times that triggered the transition to the first special game state, and the continuation period by the display continuation means is the second stop display period. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be the same period or a period recognized by the player as being the same as the second stop display period.

According to the feature 28, the confirmation display period is shortened in the game times that trigger the transition to the first special game state, and the confirmation display period is supplemented by the continuous display in the first special game state. The function (notification function) can be guaranteed. Then, after the confirmation display, the ball enters the first special game state, but the player is waiting for the transition to the first special game state (while waiting for the fake confirmation display to end). The unit can be operated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being directed to the variable ball entry portion.

In particular, in the game times that trigger the transition to the second special game state, the stop display period of the pattern = the confirmed display period, and in the case of the first special game state, the stop display period of the pattern = the confirmed display period + the continuous display. By setting the period (during the first special game state) and making both stop display periods equal (for example, matching), it is possible to make it appear as if it follows the flow of the game in the normal game state. As a result, it is possible to make the transition to the first special gaming state less noticeable.

The "display continuation means" shown in this feature is configured to "display the stopped-displayed picture while maintaining its display form", so that the picture remains stopped and displayed. It is possible to prevent the attention from deviating from the display screen and preferably prevent the attention from being directed to the variable ball entry portion.

Feature 29. Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control unit 81) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232 provided in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers, and
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the given information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of the special information is stored. Grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process or the like in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for sequentially performing the grant determination for the special information, and
The privilege granting means (main control) that grants the privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. (Function to execute the opening / closing process of the big winning opening in the MPU 202 of the device 81) and
A pattern display means (design display device 41) having a display unit (display screen 41a) and variably displaying a pattern on the display unit, and
The result of the grant determination is that the pattern display means starts variable display of the pattern prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means. The stop result corresponding to the above is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game, and the variable display of the pattern of each game is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is provided with a game time control means for controlling the pattern display means so as to be performed.
The privilege granting means changes the gaming state to the special gaming state based on the fact that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. It has a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) to be transferred.
A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A variable ball entry unit (variable winning device 32) provided in the game area and capable of switching to a first state and a second state in which ball entry is more difficult or impossible than the first state.
With a switching control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for switching the variable ball entry unit between the first state and the second state when the state shifts to the special gaming state. ,
With
A first switching mode and a second switching mode are set as modes of the switching control by the switching control means.
The game time control means has a stop display period variable means (a function of determining a fixed display time by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for changing the stop display period for performing the stop display.
The stop display period variable means
A means for setting the first stop display period as the stop display period in the game times that triggers the transition to the first special game state corresponding to the first switching mode, and
It has a means for setting the second stop display period as the stop display period in the game times that triggers the transition to the second special game state corresponding to the second switching mode.
In the first special game state, a display continuation means for continuing the display of the pattern stopped and displayed at the game times that triggered the transition to the first special game state is provided.
The final display period of the game result in the game times that triggered the transition to the second special game state becomes the second stop period.
The sum of the first stop display period, which is the final display period of the game result in the game times that triggered the transition to the first special game state, and the continuation period by the display continuation means is equal to or less than the first stop display period. A game machine characterized by being configured to be.

According to the feature 29, the confirmation display period is shortened in the game times that trigger the transition to the first special game state, and the confirmation display period is supplemented by the continuous display in the first special game state. The function (notification function) can be guaranteed. Then, after the confirmation display, the ball enters the first special game state, but the player is waiting for the transition to the first special game state (while waiting for the fake confirmation display to end). The unit can be operated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being directed to the variable ball entry portion.

In particular, in the game times that trigger the transition to the second special game state, the stop display period of the pattern = the fixed display period, and in the case of the first special game state, the stop display period of the picture is the fixed display period and the continuous display. By becoming less than or equal to the sum of the periods (during the first special game state), the player's attention is directed to the variable entry section in a series of flows in which the normal game state (corresponding game times) → the special game state → the normal game state. Can be suppressed.

The "display continuation means" shown in this feature is configured to "display the stopped-displayed picture while maintaining its display form", so that the picture remains stopped and displayed. It is possible to prevent the attention from deviating from the display screen and preferably prevent the attention from being directed to the variable ball entry portion.

Feature 30. The gaming machine according to feature 29, wherein the execution period of the first special gaming state is configured to have the same length as the duration or a length recognized to be the same by the player. ..

According to the feature 30, the mimicry effect shown in the feature 29 can be more preferably exerted.

Features 31. A gaming machine in which switching of the variable ball entry portion to the first state is executed a plurality of times in the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state.
The variable ball entry section has a first variable ball entry section and a second variable ball entry section that can be individually switched to the first state and the second state.
When the switching control means is at least in the first special gaming state, the first variable ball entry section and the second variable ball entry section are brought into the first state and the second state in a predetermined order. The gaming machine according to any one of features 17 to 30, characterized in that it has a means for switching.

In the various configurations shown in the feature 17 and the like, when shifting to the first special gaming state, it is preferable to shorten the period (execution period) required for the first special gaming state as much as possible. Here, it is necessary to secure an operation period, a discharge period of the winning game ball, and the like for the variable ball entry unit, and the first special game state is extended by the collateral of these periods. Therefore, when used in combination with the configuration shown in this feature, the above period can be suitably shortened. Therefore, in combination with the configuration of shortening the stop display period in the game times that triggered the transition to the first special gaming state, it is possible to suppress the transition to the first special gaming state from being excessively conspicuous.

It should be noted that the configuration shown in this feature is described as "the variable ball entry portion is inserted into the first opening through which the game ball can flow in, the first state in which the game ball can enter the first opening, and the first state. A first variable ball entry unit having a first movable body that can switch to the second state where the ball is difficult or impossible to enter, a second opening through which the game ball can flow in, and a game ball into the second opening. A second variable entry ball having the first state in which the ball can be entered and a second movable body capable of switching to the second state in which the entry of the game ball is more difficult or impossible than the first state. When the switching control means is in the special gaming state, the first variable ball entry section and the second variable ball entry section are placed in a predetermined order in the first state and the first variable ball entry section. The game machine according to any one of the features 17 to 30, which is characterized by having a means for switching between the two states. "

Feature 32. The privilege granting means changes the gaming state from the normal gaming state based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being the granting response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. It has a game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) to shift to the special game state.
A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A variable ball entry unit (variable winning device 32) provided in the game area and capable of switching to a first state and a second state in which ball entry is more difficult or impossible than the first state.
With a switching control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for switching the variable ball entry unit between the first state and the second state when the state shifts to the special gaming state. ,
With
As an aspect of the switching control by the switching control means, the first switching mode and the period from the second state to the return of the variable ball entry unit to the second state through the first state are the first switching modes. A longer second switching mode is set,
As the stop display period, a first stop display period and a second stop display period shorter than the first stop display period are provided.
The stop display period variable means
A means for setting the second stop display period as the stop display period in the game times that triggers the transition to the first special game state corresponding to the first switching mode, and
Feature 1 to Feature 31 characterized by having a means for setting the second stop display period as a stop display period in a game time other than the game time that triggers the transition to the first special game state. The gaming machine described in any one of.

As the game progresses, the pattern is variably displayed on the display unit, and the pattern corresponding to the result of the grant determination is stopped and displayed. According to this feature, by changing the stop display period, for example, the rhythm of the game can be changed by giving a change such as slowness or speed to the progress of the game according to the game situation or the like. As a result, it is possible to more preferably suppress the monotonization of the game and contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

Even in the case of shifting to the special gaming state, if it is in the first special gaming state, it becomes a factor that reduces the player's willingness to play. Here, in the game times that trigger the transition to the first special gaming state, the occurrence of such inconvenience is preferably generated by shortening the stop display period and making the transition to the first special gaming state less noticeable. Can be suppressed. In particular, when comparing the case where the grant result is related to the transition to the first special gaming state and the case where the other result is obtained, the proportion of the latter is larger than that of the former. Therefore, in consideration of such a situation, in order to intentionally shorten the stop display period at the time of transition to the first special game state, the transition from the corresponding game times to the first special game state is made due to the relationship with other game times. There is a technical significance of making it less noticeable.

Feature 33. The execution period required for the first special gaming state is configured to be shorter than the execution period required for the second special gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode.
The feature 32 characterized in that the first special gaming state is provided with a display continuation means for continuing the display of the pattern stopped and displayed at the game times that triggered the transition to the first special gaming state. The game machine described in.

In the first place, there may be three measures to prevent the player's attention from being directed to the variable ball entry portion. That is, (1) it is difficult to understand that the transition to the first special gaming state has been confirmed, (2) it is difficult to understand that the transition to the first special gaming state has been confirmed, and (3) the variable ball entry section. It is to make the movement of. In measure (1), it may be difficult for the player to grasp the transition to the first special gaming state, which may cause a shortage of disadvantages, and in measure (3), the visibility of the variable ball entry portion is reduced. It becomes an obstacle when you want to appeal the movement of the variable ball entry part in other special game states. In other words, there are limits to the measures (1) and (3) when consideration is given to securing the profits of the player and improving the interest of the game machine. In this respect, as shown in this feature, in the first special game state in which the execution period is set to be relatively short, if it is combined with the configuration in which the display of the pattern stopped and displayed at the corresponding game times is continued, the first Although the transition to the 1 special gaming state is clearly indicated, it is difficult to grasp that the 1st special gaming state itself has been reached by making it appear as if the transition to the 1st special gaming state has not yet occurred. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress the player's attention from the variable ball entry portion while avoiding the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences.

The execution period of the first special game state may be set shorter than the stop display period (second stop display period) in the game times other than the game times that triggered the transition to the first special game state.

Feature 34. The display control means has a display mode determining means for determining a variable display mode of a pattern based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means.
One of the features 1 to 33, wherein the stop display period variable means has a means for setting the stop display period based on the variable display mode determined by the display mode determining means. The game machine described in.

By setting the stop display period according to the variable display mode as shown in the feature 34, it is possible to suppress the game progress from becoming monotonous. For example, in a mere out-of-game game in which the so-called reach display is not performed, the stop display period is shortened to prevent the game from being unnecessarily delayed, and the player's attention is lost and the game is followed from the resulting game time. It can be directed to the game times of.

Any one of the technical ideas shown in each of the above-mentioned features may be applied to other features, or the technical ideas shown in a plurality of features may be combined and applied to other features. It is also possible to extract a part of the configuration shown in each feature and apply it to other features.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means (launching handle 54) operated by a player, a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the launched game ball. A ball passage (rail portions 51, 52) leading to a predetermined game area (game area PE) and each game part arranged in the game area are provided, and a predetermined passing part (general prize) among the game parts is provided. A gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a mouth 31 or the like.

Rotating game machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displaying the symbol row in the final stop, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A game machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Belt-type game machine using a ball: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displaying the symbol sequence in the final stop, the symbol variation is started and stopped due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. (Game, etc.) is generated, and further, a throwing device provided with a ball saucer and a throwing device for taking in a game ball from the ball saucer and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball saucer is provided. A game machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the game ball is thrown in.

10 ... Pachinko machine as a game machine, 23 ... Game board, 24 ... Variable winning device, 33 ... Actuating port unit, 33a ... Upper operating port as a ball entry part, 33b ... Design display device as a pattern display means, 41 ... Design display device as a picture display means, 41a ... Display screen, 81 ... Main control device constituting game time control means, 82 ... Notification / effect control device, 202 ... MPU, 203 ... ROM, 204 ... RAM, 212 ... Display Control device, Da ... Hold number display area, Db ... Execution target display area, ME ... Variable display area, PE ... Game area, Z1 to Z3 ... Symbol sequence.

Claims (2)

Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
An acquisition information storage means that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers.
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the given information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of the special information is stored. Grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination for special information,
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the transition means for shifting the gaming state to the grant support state. ,
A pattern display means having a display unit and variably displaying a pattern on the display unit,
Based on the fact that the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means, the symbol display means starts variable display of the symbol, and the symbol display means so as to stop and display the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. Equipped with display control means for display control
The display control means has a stop display period setting means for setting a stop display period for performing the stop display.
The transition means is configured to shift the gaming state to the grant-corresponding state after the winning game times in which the determination result of the grant-determining means corresponds to the grant-corresponding result are executed.
As the grant-corresponding state, a plurality of grant-corresponding states having different degrees of advantage are provided.
As the stop display period, a plurality of stop display periods including a first stop display period and a second stop display period shorter than the first stop display period are provided.
When the type of the grant support state is a predetermined grant support state among the plurality of grant support states, the stop display period setting means of the winning game times, which is an opportunity to shift to the predetermined grant support state. A means for setting the stop display period to be the second stop display period, or making the stop display period more likely to be the second stop display period than the first stop display period .
In a situation where the stop display period of the winning game is the second stop display period, the stop result of the winning game is displayed as a stop corresponding to the second stop display period of the second stop display period. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means capable of being continuously displayed even after the end . The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the game is performed using a predetermined gaming medium.

Images